1 PDF

WESTRACE
First-Line Maintenance Manual

Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
ABN 78 000 102 483 No. 112 & 114 Raheja Chambers
179–185 Normanby Rd 12 Museum Road
(Locked Bag 66) Bangalore 560 001
South Melbourne India
Victoria 3205 P +91 80 3058 8763/64
Australia F +91 80 3058 8765
P +61 3 9233 8888 E rail.enquiries@invensysrail.com
F +61 3 9233 8702 W http://www.wrsi.in
E wrsa@wrsa.com.au
W http://www.wrsa.com.au
WESTRACE
First-Line Maintenance Manual
Document CI: WRTOFLMM
Issue: 10.0
Date of Issue: 10 February 2009
Change History:
Issue Date Comment Changed Checked Approved
1.0 7/9/94 WRTFGEN. initial issue
2.0 4/4/96 WRTFGEN, CR273
3.0 30/10/96 WRTFGEN, CR319
1.0 16/11/94 WETFWAYE, initial release
2.0 17/12/96 WETFWAYE, CR1385, CR1728, WR348,
WR349, WR350
4.0 1/9/00 WRTOFLMM, initial issue. Compiled from PGB
WRTFGEN 3.0 and WETFWAYE 2.0
CR333, 334, 379, 394, 395, 402, 404, 405,
406, 407, 440, 454, 502, 515
5.0 3/8/01 Rebuilt to correct faulty 4.0 build PGB
6.0 20/2/03 CR 783, 789, 790 PGB
7.0 11/10/04 CR831 ML DJ WMcD
8.0 12/9/05 CR325, 340, 345, 372, 378 ML SR WMcD
9.0 29/1/07 CR423, 428, 433 ML SR WMcD
10.0 10/2/09 Updated branding ML ML WMcD
Controlled Copy Number:

Controlled Copies are identified by a Controlled Copy Number that must be inserted in red handwriting. Any copy not
meeting this criterion is considered to be uncontrolled and may not be the current version.
Copyright
This document is protected by Copyright and all information contained therein is confidential. The contents of this document
must not be copied and the information therein must not be used, or disclosed except with the written permission of and in
the manner permitted by Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Pty Ltd.
Copyright © 2009 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Pty Ltd ABN 78 000 102 483
PREFACE
This is the First-Line Maintenance Manual for WESTRACE Vital

Signalling Equipment and WESTECT ATP Wayside equipment.
It is applicable to:
• WESTRACE Vital Signalling Systems;
• WESTECT Encoders;
• combined WESTRACE interlocking WESTECT Encoders.
WESTRACE is a safety critical system.
Any maintenance of the WESTRACE equipment that does not

conform to the requirements of this manual could compromise
safety.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER PAGE
1 Introduction
1.1 New in This Issue 1-1
1.2 Purpose of the Manual 1-1
1.3 Audience 1-1
1.4 Scope of the Manual 1-1
1.5 References 1-2
1.6 Relationship with Other Manuals 1-4
1.7 Organisation of This Manual 1-5
1.8 Conventions 1-6
1.9 Terminology 1-6
1.10 Personal Safety 1-7
2 WESTRACE, WESTECT and Safety

2.1 WESTRACE 2-1
2.1.1 What is WESTRACE? 2-1
2.1.2 WESTRACE Philosophy 2-2
2.1.3 Safety Methodology 2-2
2.1.3.1 General 2-2
2.1.3.2 How WESTRACE Achieves Safety 2-2
2.2 WESTECT 2-3
2.2.1 What is WESTECT? 2-3
2.2.2 WESTECT Philosophy 2-4
2.2.3 Safety Methodology 2-4
3 System Description
3.1 Introduction 3-1
3.2 WESTRACE System 3-1
3.3 System Power Requirements 3-3
3.4 Output Power Control Relay (OPCR) 3-3
3.5 Hot Stand-by 3-4
3.6 Vital Communication 3-4
3.7 Non-vital Communications 3-4
3.8 WESTECT Encoders 3-5
3.8.1 WESTECT Communication Module (WCM) 3-5
3.8.2 Communications Rack 3-5
3.9 WESTECT Remote Radio Installations 3-6
3.10 WESTECT Adjacent Interlockings 3-6
4 System Configuration
4.1 Vital Telemetry 4-1
4.2 Radio Frequency 4-1
4.3 Configurable Modules 4-1
4.4 Installation Addresses 4-1
5 WESTRACE Operating Characteristics

5.1 Start Up Sequence 5-1
5.2 Normal Working 5-6
5.2.1 LEDs 5-6
5.2.2 Graceful Degradation 5-6
5.2.3 OPCR Exercise 5-6
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 vii

Contents
6 Maintenance
6.1 Equipment Handling 6-1
6.1.1 Anti-Static Protection 6-1
6.1.2 Packing 6-1
6.1.3 Storage 6-2
6.1.4 Transport 6-2
6.1.5 Lithium Batteries 6-2
6.2 Power Up and Down 6-3
6.3 Service 6-4
6.3.1 Routine Maintenance 6-4
6.3.1.1 Connections & Cable 6-4
6.3.1.2 Earthing 6-4
6.3.1.3 Power Supply 6-4
6.3.1.4 Operating Environment 6-4
6.3.1.5 Exercise OPCR 6-4
6.3.1.6 Replace Lithium Battery 6-5
6.3.2 Downloading Non-vital Configuration to NVLM 6-5
6.3.3 Replacement of Faulty Modules 6-5
6.3.4 Replacement of PFMs 6-6
6.3.5 Module Repair 6-7
6.3.6 Reporting of WESTRACE Faults 6-7
6.3.7 Return to Service after Maintenance 6-7
6.4 Disposal 6-7
7 Fault Conditions and Errors

7.1 Reading Fault Codes 7-1
7.2 Fault Finding 7-3
7.3 Faults During Start-Up 7-7
7.4 Faults During Normal Working 7-9
8 WESTECT Communication Equipment—Fault Finding

8.2 Equipment 8-1
8.3 System 8-1
8.3.1 Fault Finding 8-1
8.3.2 Power Supply 8-3
8.3.3 Connections & Cable 8-3
8.3.4 Earthing 8-3
8.4 Communication Housing Removal & Replacement 8-3
8.5 Radio & Control Module 8-4
8.5.1 Checking 8-4
8.5.2 Removal & Replacement 8-4
8.6 Radios 8-4
8.6.1 Checking 8-4
8.6.2 UHF Radios—Removal Replacement 8-5
8.7 Antenna System 8-6
8.8 Verification of Transmissions 8-9
8.8.1 Data Checking 8-9
8.8.2 Coverage 8-9
9 WESTECT Transponders—Fault Finding and Replacement

9.2 Equipment 9-1
9.3 System 9-1
9.4 Faulty Link Transponders 9-1
viii Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Contents
9.5 Personal Safety 9-2

9.6 Checking Transponders 9-2
9.7 Programming 9-3
9.8 Installation 9-4
9.9 Verification 9-4
Appendix A—Module Descriptions

A.1 Vital Logic Module (VLM6) A-2
A.1.1 VLM6 Description A-2
A.1.1.1 VLM6 Vital Logic Card (VLC6) Description A-2
A.1.1.2 VLM6 Output Power Card (OPC) Description A-3
A.1.1.3 VLM6 Universal Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (UHVBC) Description A-3
A.1.2 VLM6 Configuration A-4
A.1.2.1 VLM6 Vital Logic Card (VLC6) Configuration A-4
A.1.2.2 VLM6 Output Power Card (OPC) Configuration A-6
A.1.2.3 VLM6 Universal Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (UHVBC)
Configuration A-6
A.1.3 VLM6 Indications A-6
A.1.3.1 VLM6 Vital Logic Card (VLC6) Indications A-6
A.1.3.1.1 Start Up Indications A-6
A.1.3.1.2 Operation Indications A-6
A.1.3.1.3 Fault Codes A-7
A.1.3.2 VLM6 Output Power Card (OPC) Indications A-13
A.1.3.3 VLM6 Universal Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (UHVBC) Indications A-14
A.1.4 VLM6 External Connections A-14
A.2.1 VLM5 Description A-15
A.2.1.1 VLM5 Vital Logic Card (VLC5) Description A-15
A.2.1.2 VLM5 Output Power Card (OPC) Description A-16
A.2.1.3 VLM5 Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (HVBC) Description A-16
A.2.2 VLM5 Configuration A-17
A.2.2.1 VLM5 Vital Logic Card (VLC5) Configuration A-17
A.2.2.3 VLM5 Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (HVBC) Configuration A-19
A.2.3 VLM5 Indications A-19
A.2.3.1 VLM5 Vital Logic Card (VLC5) Indications A-19
A.2.3.3 VLM5 Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (HVBC) Configuration A-31
A.2.4 VLM5 External Connections A-31
A.3 Hot Standby Vital Logic Module (HVLM128) A-33
A.3.1 Description A-33
A.3.1.1 Hot Standby Vital Logic Card (HVLC) A-33
A.3.1.2 Output Power Card (OPC) A-34
A.3.1.3 Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (HVBC) A-34
A.3.2 Configuration A-35
A.3.3 Indications A-37
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 ix

Contents

A.3.4 External Connections A-50
A.4.1.1 Vital Logic Card (VLC) A-51
A.4.1.2 Configuration Element Card (CEC) A-51
A.4.1.4 Vital Backplane Card (VBC) A-52
A.5 Vital Lamp Output Modules (VLOM) A-62
A.5.2 Particulars A-62
A.5.3 Characteristics of VLOM 110 A-62
A.5.4 Function A-62
A.5.6.1 Start Up A-63
A.5.6.2 Operation A-63
A.5.6.3 Fault Codes A-63
A.6 Vital Relay Output Modules (VROM) A-68
A.6.3 Characteristics of VROM 50 A-68
A.6.4 Function A-68
A.7 Vital Parallel Input Modules (VPIM) A-74
A.7.3 Characteristics of VPIM 50 A-74
A.7.4 Function A-74
x Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Contents
A.8 Vital Telemetry Continuous Module (VTC) A-78

A.8.3 Function A-78
A.9 Enhanced Vital Telemetry Continuous Module (EVTC) A-83
A.9.3 Function A-83
A.10 WESTECT Communications Module (WCM) A-88
A.10.3 Function A-88
A.11 Network Communication Diagnostic Module (NCDM) A-92
A.11.2.1 Circuit Boards A-93
A.11.2.2 External Ports A-93
A.11.2.3 Serial Control System Ports or Network Control System Sessions A-94
A.11.2.4 Serial Diagnostic Ports or Network Diagnostic Sessions A-95
A.11.2.5 Production Port A-96
A.11.2.6 Serial Power Supply A-96
A.11.2.7 Installation Status A-96
A.11.4 Operation A-97
A.11.4.1 Selecting Maintenance Mode A-97
A.11.4.2 Selecting Production Mode A-98
A.11.5.1 Hardware Settings A-98
A.11.5.2 Non-vital Configuration A-100
A.11.5.3 Replacing the NCDM A-101
A.11.5.4 Battery Installation A-105
A.11.6.1 Network Communication Diagnostic Card LEDs A-107
A.11.6.2 NCD PFM LEDs A-108
A.11.6.3 Alphanumeric Display A-108
A.11.6.4 Start Up A-109
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 xi

Contents
A.11.6.6 Fault Detection A-110

A.11.6.6.1 WESTRACE Module Faults A-110
A.11.6.6.2 NCDM Faults A-111
A.11.6.7.1 Port Faults A-112
A.11.6.7.2 Module or Session Faults A-113
A.11.6.7.3 Internal faults A-115
A.11.7.1 Serial Power Connector A-119
A.11.7.2 Installation Status Connector A-120
A.11.7.3 Serial Connectors A-120
A.11.7.4 Network Connector A-121
A.11.7.5 INCL Connector A-121
A.11.7.7 Cabling Details A-122
A.11.7.8 Connecting a Diagnostic System A-123
A.12 Non-vital Communications and Diagnostic Module (NVC/DM) A-125
A.12.2.1 Circuit Boards A-125
A.12.2.2 External Ports A-126
A.12.2.4 Serial Power Supply A-127
A.12.4.1 Selecting Maintenance Mode A-128
A.12.4.2 Selecting Production Mode A-129
A.12.5.1 Hardware Settings A-129
A.12.5.2 Non-vital Configuration A-130
A.12.5.3 Replacing the NVC/DM A-131
A.12.6.1 Logic Evaluation Card LEDs A-137
A.12.6.2 Communications Interface Module LEDs A-137
A.12.6.3 Alphanumeric Display A-138
A.12.6.4 Start Up A-139
A.12.6.6 Fault Detection A-139
A.12.6.6.1 WESTRACE Module Faults A-139
A.12.6.6.2 NVC/DM Faults A-140
A.12.6.7.1 Port faults A-141
A.12.6.7.2 Telemetry Address Faults A-142
A.12.6.7.3 Internal faults A-143
A.12.7.1 Serial Power Connector A-146
A.12.7.2 Diagnostic and Telemetry Serial Connectors A-146
A.12.7.5 Connecting a Diagnostic System A-149
A.13 Non-vital Communications Module (NVC) A-151
xii Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Contents

A.13.4.1 Slave Address A-152
A.13.4.2 System Bit A-152
A.13.4.3 Telfail A-152
A.13.4.4 Data Transfer Rate A-153
A.13.4.5 Data Word Length A-154
A.13.4.6 Modem A-154
A.13.4.7 Transmit Data Clock A-154
A.13.4.8 Unused A-154
A.13.5.1 Start Up A-155
A.13.6.1 RS232-C Connections A-157
A.13.6.2 RS422 Connections A-158
A.14 Diagnostic Module (DM) A-159
A.14.6.1 Start Up A-161
A.14.7.1 Event Recorder Interface A-161
A.14.7.2 Technician Interface A-162
A.15 Diagnostic Module 128 (DM128) A-164
A.15.5.2 Mnemonic Selection Default A-166
A.15.5.3 Command Echo Default A-166
A.15.6.1 Start Up A-167
A.15.7.1 Event Recorder Interface A-167
A.15.7.2 Technician Interface A-168
A.16 Power Supply Unit (PSU) A-170
A.16.3 Characteristics of PSU 24 A-170
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 xiii

Contents

A.17 Protection and Filter Modules (PFMs) A-172
A.18 VLE Backplane A-173
A.19 Blanker Card A-174
A.20 A-175
A.21 Housing Systems A-176
A.22 A-179
Appendix B—Diagnostic Module Technician Interface

B.1 General Description B-2
B.2 Event Recorder Interface B-2
B.2.1 CLEAR B-2
B.2.2 DATE_TIME B-3
B.2.3 EVENT B-3
B.2.4 FAULT B-3
B.2.5 MODULE B-4
B.2.6 VLE_DATA B-4
B.3 Technician Interface B-4
B.3.1 CLEAR B-5
B.3.2 CONFIGURATION B-5
B.3.3 DATE_TIME B-6
B.3.4 DISPLAY B-6
B.3.5 EVENT B-7
B.3.6 FAULT B-7
B.3.7 HELP B-8
B.3.8 MODULE B-8
B.3.9 PRINT B-9
B.3.10 VLE B-10
Appendix C—Diagnostic Module Logging Package

C.1 General Description C-2
C.2 Hardware Requirements C-2
C.3 Installation C-2
C.4 Running the Package C-2
C.5 Event Logging C-3
C.6 Commands C-4
C.6.1 ALT H C-4
C.6.2 ALT D C-4
C.6.3 ALT T C-4
C.6.4 ALT X C-4
C.6.5 Diagnostic Module Commands C-4
xiv Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Contents
Appendix D—MoviolaW
D.1 General Description D-2
D.2 Installation and Hardware Requirements D-2
D.3 Operational Overview D-2
D.3.1 Real Time or Replay D-2
D.3.2 Faults and Failures D-3
D.3.3 Track Diagram D-3
D.3.4 Events Window D-4
D.3.5 Variables Window D-4
D.3.6 Faults Window D-4
D.3.7 Failures Window D-4
D.3.8 Operations Window D-5
D.3.9 Commands Window D-5
D.3.10 Reports Window D-5
D.3.11 Hardware Window D-6
D.3.12 Housing Window D-6
D.3.13 DM128 Driver Window D-6
D.4 Communication with NVC/DM or NCDM D-6
D.4.1 Passwords D-6
D.4.2 Dial Out Numbers for NVC/DM or NCDM D-7
D.4.3 NVC/DM Driver Window D-7
D.5 Telemetry Statistics for NVC/DM or NCDM D-7
Appendix E—GETLOG Utility

E.1 Introduction E-2
E.2 Operation E-2
E.2.1 Status Display E-2
E.2.2 Upload Display E-3
E.2.3 Menu Functions E-5
E.3 Command Line Parameters E-7
E.3.1 Mode Selection Options E-7
E.3.2 Functional Options E-7
E.3.3 File Output Options E-8
E.3.4 Link Configuration E-8
E.3.5 Protocol Configuration E-8
Appendix F—NGETLOG Utility

F.1 Introduction F-2
F.2 Operation F-2
F.2.1 Status Display F-2
F.2.2 Upload Display F-3
F.2.3 Menu Functions F-5
F.3 Command Line Parameters F-7
F.3.1 Mode Selection Options F-7
F.3.2 Functional Options F-8
F.3.3 File Output Options F-8
F.3.4 Link Configuration F-8
F.3.5 Protocol Configuration F-8
Appendix G—S2 Telemetry Modules
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 xv

Contents
Appendix H—Communication Module Descriptions

H.1 Communications Rack H-2
H.1.1 Description H-2
H.1.2 Function H-2
H.1.3 Operation H-3
H.1.3.1 WESTECT Communication Module (WCM) H-3
H.1.3.2 Radio and Control Module (RCM) H-3
H.1.3.3 Radios H-4
H.1.4 Configuration H-5
H.1.4.1 Radio Channel H-5
H.1.4.2 Transmit Power H-5
H.1.5 Indications H-5
H.1.5.1 Start Up H-5
H.1.5.2 Operation H-6
H.1.5.3 Fault Codes H-6
H.2 Remote RCM H-7
H.2.2 Function H-7
H.2.3 Operation H-8
H.2.3.1 WESTECT WCM Module H-8
H.2.3.2 WESTECT Remote Radio and Communication Module H-8
H.3 H-10
H.4 Remote Communications Rack H-11
H.4.2 Function H-11
H.4.3 Operation H-12
H.4.3.1 WESTECT WCM Module H-12
H.4.3.2 WESTECT Radio and Control Module (RCM) H-12
H.4.3.3 Remote Communication Rack—Radios H-13
H.4.4 Configuration H-14
H.4.4.1 Radio Channel H-14
H.5 H-16
Appendix I—Repair Request Form
Glossary
xvi Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE PAGE
1.1 WESTRACE and Related Manuals 1-4
1.2 WESTECT and Related Manuals 1-4
5.1 Start-up Timeline—HVLM128—Typical 5-2
5.2 Start-up Timeline—VLM5—Typical 5-3
5.3 Start-up Timeline—VLM6—Standalone—Typical 5-4
5.4 Start-up Timeline—VLM6—Hot Stand-by—Typical 5-5
7.1 Fault Diagnostic LEDs 7-2
7.2 Fault Diagnostic LEDs—Reading 7-2
7.3 Fault Finding Flow Chart (Part 1) 7-4
8.1 General Fault Finding Process 8-2
8.2 Reflected Power Meter—Inserting 8-7
8.3 ATP Radio Setup & Configuration Checklist 8-8
A.1 VLC6—Layout—VLM6 A-3
A.2 UHVBC—Rear Side View—VLM6 A-4
A.3 Typical GCSS Installation Reports and SW1 Settings—VLM6 A-5
A.4 External Connections—HOPC PFM—VLM6 A-14
A.5 Layout—VLC5—VLM5 A-16
A.6 HVBC—Rear Side View—VLM5 A-17
A.7 Typical GCSS Installation Reports and SW1 Settings—VLM5 A-18
A.8 External Connections—HOPC PFM—VLM5 A-32
A.9 Layout—HVLC—HVLM A-34
A.10 Rear Side View—HVBC—HVLM A-35
A.11 Typical GCSS Installation Reports and SW1 Settings—HVLM128 A-36
A.12 External Connections—HOPC PFM—HVLM A-50
A.13 Layout—CEC—VLM1 A-51
A.14 General Arrangement from Rear—VBC—VLM1 A-52
A.15 Example SW1 Settings—CEC—VLM1 A-53
A.16 External Connections—OPC PFM—VLM1 A-61
A.17 External Connections—VLOM PFM—VLOM A-67
A.18 External Connections—VROM PFM—VROM A-73
A.19 External Connections—VPIM PFM—VPIM A-77
A.20 External Connections—SIO232 PFM—VTC A-81
A.21 External Connections—SIO232 PFM—EVTC A-87
A.22 External Connections—SIO232 PFM—WCM A-91
A.23 External Ports on the Two Styles of NCD PFM—NCDM A-94
A.24 Configuration Switches and Jumpers—Mod D Rev 7 NCDC A-98
A.25 Configuration Switches and Pushbuttons—Mod E Rev 8 NCDC A-99
A.26 Separating the NCDC and VLC6 A-102
A.27 Setting Non-vital Configuration—Version 1 Example (Mod D Rev 7 NCDC shown) A-103
A.28 Production Port—Connecting—NCDM A-104
A.29 Lithium Battery—Two Connector Types—NCDM A-106
A.30 User Interface—NCDC and VLM6—NCDM A-107
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 xvii

List of Figures
A.31 User Interface—NCD PFM—NCDM A-108

A.32 Four Digit Alphanumeric Display—NCDM A-111
A.33 Alphanumeric Display—Port Fault—NCDM A-112
A.34 Alphanumeric Display—Module or Session Fault—NCDM A-114
A.35 Alphanumeric Display—Internal Fault—NCDM A-115
A.36 External Connectors on the Two Styles of NCD PFM—NCDM A-119
A.37 Cable Configuration Details—NCDM A-123
A.38 Configuration Switches and Jumpers—NVC/DM A-129
A.39 Removing a Card From the WESTRACE Housing A-131
A.40 CIMFIM With Four Daughter Boards—NVC/DM A-132
A.41 Separating the LEC and CIMFIM—NVC/DM A-133
A.42 Non-vital Configuration—Setting Version 1—NVC/DM A-134
A.43 Production Port—Connecting—NVC/DM A-135
A.44 Lithium Battery—NVC/DM A-136
A.45 User Interface—NVC/DM A-137
A.46 Four Digit Alphanumeric Display—NVC/DM A-141
A.47 Alphanumeric Display—Port Fault—NVC/DM A-141
A.48 Alphanumeric Display—S2 Address Fault—NVC/DM A-143
A.49 Alphanumeric Display—Internal Fault—NVC/DM A-143
A.50 External Connectors—CIMPM Card—NVC/DM A-146
A.51 Production Port—NVC/DM A-148
A.52 Cable Configuration Details—NVC/DM A-149
A.53 Configuration Switches—NVC A-152
A.54 Slave Address—Setting—NVC A-152
A.55 Clock Reconstruction Daughter Board—NVC A-153
A.56 External Connections—SIO232 PFM—NVC A-157
A.57 External Connections—SIO422 PFM—NVC A-158
A.58 RS422 Connector Pin Numbering—SIO422 PFM—NVC A-158
A.59 Layout—DM Module A-160
A.60 Configuration Switch—DM Module A-160
A.61 External Connections—SIO232 PFM—DM Module A-162
A.62 Interface Cable Configuration—DM Module A-163
A.63 Layout—DM 128 A-165
A.64 Links or SW1 Switches—Default Settings—DM128 A-165
A.65 External Connections—SIO232 PFM—DM128 A-168
A.66 Interface Cable Configuration—DM128 A-169
A.68 Single Housing System A-176
A.69 Two Housing System A-176
A.70 Three Housing System A-177
A.71 Four Housing System A-178
H.1 Block Diagram of Communication Housing H-2
xviii Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE PAGE
3.1 Vital Logic Module—Components 3-2
8.1 Removal and Replacement—Communication Housing 8-3
8.2 Removal and Replacement—Radio and Control Module 8-4
8.3 Removal and replacement—UHF Radios 8-5
8.4 Removal and replacement—UHF Radios—Radio 1 Faulty 8-5
8.5 Removal and replacement—UHF Radios—Radio 2 Faulty 8-6
A1 CONF1, CONF2, LK25, LK26—Link Settings A-6
A2 Fault Codes—Block—VLM6 A-7
A3 Fault Codes—Specific Initialisation—VLM6 A-11
A4 CONF1, CONF2—Link Settings A-19
A5 Fault Codes—Block—VLM5 A-20
A6 Fault Codes—Specific Initialisation—VLM5 A-24
A7 Fault Codes—Specific Standby Mode—VLM5 A-26
A8 Fault Codes—Specific On-line—VLM5 A-28
A9 CONF1, CONF2—Link Settings A-37
A10 Fault Codes—Block—HVLM A-38
A11 Fault Codes—Specific Initialisation—HVLM A-42
A12 Fault Code—Specific Standby Mode—HVLM A-44
A13 Fault Codes—Specific On-line Mode—HVLM A-46
A14 Fault Codes—VLM1 A-53
A15 Fault Codes—VLOM A-63
A16 Fault Codes—VROM A-69
A17 Fault Codes—VPIM A-75
A18 Fault Codes—VTC A-79
A19 DB25 Pinout—SIO232 PFM—VTC A-81
A20 Fault Codes—EVTC A-85
A21 DB25 Pinout—SIO232 PFM—EVTC A-87
A22 Fault Codes—WCM A-89
A23 DB25 Pinout—SIO232 PFM—WCM A-91
A24 Port Number Allocation—NCDM A-93
A25 Operating Modes—NCDM A-97
A26 Switch Bank 2—Valid Settings—NCDM A-100
A27 Start-up Display Sequence—NCDM A-109
A28 Operation Indicators—Normal—NCDM A-110
A29 Fault Codes—Port Codes in General—NCDM A-112
A30 Fault Codes—Ext. Port—Module and Session—NCDM A-113
A31 Fault Codes—Internal Port—NCDM A-113
A32 Fault Codes—Module or Session—NCDM A-114
A33 Fault Codes—Other—Module or Session—NCDM A-114
A34 Fault Codes—Fatal—NCDM A-115
A35 Fault Codes—Non-fatal—NCDM A-116
A36 Fault Codes—Other (Not Displayed)—NCDM A-118
A37 Serial Power Connector Pinout—NCD PFM—NCDM A-119
A38 Installation Status Connector Pinout—NCD PFM—NCDM A-120
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 xix

List of Tables
A39 DB9 Pinout—RS232 Connection—NCD PFM—NCDM A-120

A40 DB9 Pinout—RS485 Connection—NCD PFM—NCDM A-120
A41 RJ45 Pinout—Network Connection—NCD PFM—NCDM A-121
A42 DB9 Pinout—Production Port—NCDM A-121
A43 Allocation of Port Numbers—NVC/DM A-126
A44 Operating Modes—NVC/DM A-128
A45 Switch Bank S2—Valid Settings—NVC/DM A-130
A46 Start-up Display Sequence—NVC/DM A-139
A47 Normal Operation Indicators—NVC/DM A-139
A48 Fault Codes—Port Codes in General—NVC/DM A-142
A49 Fault Codes—Port Codes—Other—NVC/DM A-142
A50 Fault Codes—S2 Address—NVC/DM A-143
A51 Fault Codes—Telemetry—Other—NVC/DM A-143
A52 Fault Codes—Fatal—NVC/DM A-144
A53 Fault Codes—Non-fatal—NVC/DM A-145
A54 Fault Codes—Other—NVC/DM A-145
A55 Serial Power Pinout—NVC/DM A-146
A56 DB9 Pinout—RS232 Connection—NVC/DM A-146
A57 DB9 Pinout—RS485 Connection—NVC/DM A-147
A58 DB9 Pinout—Production Port—NVC/DM A-148
A59 Data Transfer Rate—Setting—NVC A-153
A60 Data Word Length—Setting—NVC A-154
A61 Fault Codes—NVC A-155
A62 DB25 Pinout—SIO232 PFM—NVC A-157
A63 14-Way Ribbon Header Pinout—SIO422 PFM—NVC A-158
A64 DB25 Pinout—Event Recorder Interface—SIO232 PFM—DM Module A-162
A65 DB25 Pinout—Technician Interface—DM Module A-162
A66 Data Transfer Rate — Setting — DM128 A-166
A67 Mnemonic Language — Setting — DM128 A-166
A68 Echo Command — Setting — DM128 A-166
A69 DB25 Pinout — Event Recorder Interface — SIO232 PFM—DM128 A-168
A70 DB25 Pinout—Technician Interface—DM128 A-168
H1 Radio Channel Selection (TAIT Radios) H-4
H2 Radio Channel Selection (Motorola Radios) H-4
H3 Setting of Motorola Radio Power Output H-5
H4 Tait Radio Channel Selection H-13
H5 Motorola Radio Channel Selection H-14
xx Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Chapter 1—Introduction
New in This Issue
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 New in This Issue

This issue of the WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual (Issue 10.0)
contains the following changes:
• new NCDC—Mod E Rev 8 (section A.11.5);
• updates to Action column of VLM1, HVLM128, VLM5 and VLM6 fault
codes 35–59.
1.2 Purpose of the Manual

This manual describes procedures for quickly and accurately diagnosing
problems with WESTRACE Vital Signalling Systems and WESTECT
Wayside ATP equipment and returning them to correct operation.
1.3 Audience
Maintenance personnel performing first-line maintenance on
WESTRACE Vital Signalling Systems and WESTECT Wayside ATP
equipment.
Maintenance personnel should:

• have a thorough understanding of railway operation rules and
practices as applicable to first-line maintenance;
• have a working knowledge of personal computers and Microsoft
Windows.
• be conversant with the personal safety requirements of section 1.10.
1.4 Scope of the Manual

This manual is limited to the identification and replacement of faulty
WESTRACE and WESTECT wayside equipment.
Where WESTECT ATP is not installed, ignore the sections in this

manual that mention WESTECT ATP.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 1-1

References
1.5 References
The following information may be useful for system maintenance:
a) Specific installation details for the WESTRACE installation (GCSS
printout).
This information should be stored in the Signal Equipment Room. It
includes:
• all module configurations;
• interface configurations;
• addresses;
• logic details, which includes:
• module information;
• input and output assignments;
• latch and timer assignments.
b) Vital and non-vital interface circuits and mechanical drawings
This information should be stored in the Signal Equipment Room.
The following WESTRACE manuals also provide relevant information.

All are available from Invensys Rail Systems.
[SOM] WESTRACE System Overview Manual, WRTOOVER: describes

the WESTRACE system, what it is used for and what it consists of.
[APPM] WESTRACE Application Manual, WRTOAPPM: describes the

application design of a WESTRACE signalling system. It is the
“how to” document that must be followed by system designers and
installers.
[CS] WESTRACE Configuration System User Manual, WRTOCS:

describes the use and application of the Configuration Sub System
(CSS) and Configuration Check Sub System (CCSS).
[CSS] WESTRACE Configuration Sub-System User Manual, WRTOCSS:

describes how to use the configuration tools for the programming
and checking of VLM-based WESTRACE systems. This includes
the configuration of the WESTECT Communications Module
which may be installed in a WESTRACE system.
[CCSS] WESTRACE Configuration Check Sub-System User Manual,

WRTOCCSS: describes the use and application of the CCSS which
is a DOS-based tool. CCSS is used to check that the correct
application logic is installed in a VLM-based WESTRACE system.
[GCSS] WESTRACE Graphical Configuration Sub-System User Manual,

WRTOGCSS: describes how to use the configuration tools for the
programming and checking of HVLM (and later) based
WESTRACE systems. This includes the configuration of the
WESTECT Communications Module which may be installed in a
WESTRACE system.
[GSIM] WESTRACE Graphical Simulator User Manual, WRTOGSIM:

describes how to configure GSIM to test WESTRACE Installation
logic. GSIM is a Microsoft Windows application that simulates the
operation of WESTRACE logic and trackside equipment for the
purpose of testing application data.
1-2 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
References
[MOV] MoviolaW User Manual, WRTOMOLA: describes how to set up and

use MoviolaW to display and record the state of a WESTRACE
system. MoviolaW is a suite of Windows-based diagnostic and
recording tools for WESTRACE Vital Signalling Systems and
other railway systems.
[ICS] WESTRACE Installation Check System User Manual, WRTO_ICS:

describes the use and application of the ICS to check that the
application logic is installed correctly in an HVLM (and later)
based WESTRACE system.
[ISIM] WESTRACE Interlocking Simulator User Manual, WRTOISIM:

describes how to set up the Interlocking Simulator to test
WESTRACE application data and optionally non-vital control
(Interlogic data) for railway signal interlockings.
[PCGE] WESTRACE PC Graphical Editor Manual. WRTOPCGE: describes

how to set up and use the PCGE to create station layout diagrams
for use with GSIM and MoviolaW.
[DRI] WESTECT ATP Drivers Manual. WETO_DRI: describes the use

and operation of a WESTECT system from the drivers point of
view.
[PRM] WESTECT Portable Radio Monitor User Manual. WETO_PRM:

describes how to use the diagnostic tool provided for the checking
of radio transmissions.
[PTM] WESTECT Portable Transponder Monitor User Manual.

WETO_PTM: describes how to use the diagnostic tool for checking
the programming and installation of transponders.
[CPSS] WESTECT Power Unit Configuration Sub-System User Manual.

WETO_CPS: describes how to use the configuration tool for
programming and checking the power unit specific data in train
carried equipment.
[TDM] WESTECT Train Diagnostic Monitor User Manual. WETO_TDM:

describes how to use the diagnostic tool for the retrieval and
analysis of operational, configuration and error logging data.
[WFLM] WESTECT Train Carried Equipment First Line Maintenance

Manual. WETO_FLM: describes the routine maintenance, fault
finding, module replacement and testing of the WESTECT train-
carried equipment.
[CTSS] WESTECT Transponder Configuration Sub-System User Manual.

WETO_CTS: describes how to use the configuration tool for the
programming and checking of transponders.
[WSOM] WESTECT ATP System Overview Manual. WETO_SOM: describes

the Automatic Train Protection (ATP) and the particular features
provided by WESTECT.
[SDM] WESTECT ATP System Design Manual. WETO_SDM: describes

the rules and procedures that apply to designing a WESTECT ATP
trackside system, the WESTECT train carried equipment or the
WESTRACE application logic used by the system.
[S2MM] Westronic S2 Maintenance Manual. S2TF_MM: provides guidance

for users with electronic and telemetry experience in fault finding
and maintaining Westronic S2 telecommunications equipment.

Relationship with Other Manuals
1.6 Relationship with Other Manuals

Eight manuals describe and support the WESTRACE system. Each
manual has a specific purpose and is available from Westinghouse Rail
Systems Australia. Figure 1.1 shows the relationship between the
WESTRACE manuals and other related manuals. These manuals are
described in the WESTRACE System Overview Manual [SOM].
Figure 1.1: WESTRACE and Related Manuals
Figure 1.2: WESTECT and Related Manuals
Organisation of This Manual
1.7 Organisation of This Manual

This manual contains:
Chapter 1 Introduction—describes how this manual relates to the

WESTRACE system.
Chapter 2 WESTRACE, WESTECT and Safety—describes the

safety methodology of WESTRACE and WESTECT.
Chapter 3 System Description—provides an overview of typical

WESTRACE and WESTECT installations.
Chapter 4 System Configuration—describes the configuration of

WESTECT telemetry.
Chapter 5 WESTRACE Operating Characteristics—describes

WESTRACE system operating characteristics in
detail.
Chapter 6 Maintenance—describes basic procedures for main-

taining WESTRACE.
Chapter 7 Fault Conditions and Errors—describes how to inter-

pret error codes and how to handle typical fault condi-
tions.
Chapter 8 WESTECT Communication Equipment—Fault Find-

ing—provides guidance for finding faults in the
communication equipment used to transmit WEST-
ECT radio messages.
Chapter 9 WESTECT Transponders—Fault Finding and Replace-

ment—describes first-line maintenance procedures for
track mounted transponders associated with the
WESTECT ATP system.
Appendix A Module Descriptions—describes the fundamental

features of each WESTRACE module.
Appendix B Diagnostic Module Technician Interface—describes the

fundamental features of the Diagnostic Module Tech-
nician Interface.
Appendix C Diagnostic Module Logging Package—contains details

of the Diagnostic Module Logging Package.
Appendix D MoviolaW—contains an overview of using MoviolaW

as a service tool for WESTRACE.
Appendix E GETLOG Utility—describes the use of the GETLOG

utility in extracting logged data from an NVC/DM.
Appendix F NGETLOG Utility—describes the use of the NGETLOG

utility in extracting logged data from an NVC/DM.

Conventions
Appendix G S2 Telemetry Modules—describes the fundamental

features of each WESTRONIC S2 Telemetry Module.
Appendix H Communication Module Descriptions—describes the

fundamental features of the communication equip-
ment used to transmit WESTECT radio messages.
Appendix I Repair Request Form—provides a WESTRACE Faulty

Equipment Return Form that can be photocopied.
Glossary Provides a glossary of terms that may be encountered

in WESTRACE manuals.
1.8 Conventions
This manual highlights important information as follows:
‘Action Point’—identifies a task or a requirement for performing a task.
Note: ‘Note’—highlights important information.
Caution: ‘Caution’—highlights the possibility of damage to equipment, but

not necessarily danger to personnel when handling, operating or
maintaining equipment.
‘Safety Warning’—highlights information relating to safety hazards.

Failure to follow these warnings may lead directly or indirectly to
serious equipment damage, or serious injury or death of personnel.
1.9 Terminology
The term VLM is used in a generic sense when referring to Vital Logic
Modules. If the information is specific to a particular vital logic module,
then the particular module will be mentioned.
At present, the following types of Vital Logic Module are in service:

• VLM1 (this module was previously known as VLM);
• HVLM128;
• VLM5;
• VLM6.
The term ‘Diagnostic Module’ is used in a generic sense. The particular

diagnostic module is mentioned when the information is specific.
Personal Safety
The term ‘Non-vital Configuration’ is used when discussing non-vital

data that is downloaded to NCDM or NVC/DM modules. It equates to
‘CED’ when discussing older WESTRACE technology.
1.10 Personal Safety

Persons acting on the instructions in this manual should:
• have the required certification from the rail authority, including
specific certification for working in electrified territory if
appropriate;
• railway authority to access sites and access equipment.
• adhere to the railway authority safety requirements.

Personal Safety
Chapter 2—WESTRACE, WESTECT and Safety
WESTRACE
2. WESTRACE, WESTECT AND SAFETY
This chapter is an overview of the safety aspects of the WESTRACE and

WESTECT systems.
Refer to following manuals for more details:

• WESTRACE System Overview Manual;
• WESTECT System Overview Manual.
2.1 WESTRACE
2.1.1 What is WESTRACE?

WESTRACE is a processor based vital signalling system, designed,
manufactured and supplied by Invensys Rail Systems.
WESTRACE has three main components:

• Vital and Non-vital Logic Equipment or hardware;
• Graphical Configuration System (GCS) or Configuration System (CS)
for the older systems;
• Maintenance support systems (eg MoviolaW).
The physical equipment component of WESTRACE comprises:

• A Vital Logic Module (VLM);
• An optional Non-Vital Logic Module (NVLM);
• A diagnostic module (not used when an NVLM is used);
• A number of serial and parallel input/output modules together with
protection and filter modules;
• Equipment housings.
The modularity of WESTRACE allows configuration for almost any

interlocking application, using the minimum number of modules.
Accordingly, the system can be expanded as the application increases in
size and complexity.
WESTRACE input and outputs are controlled by a set of boolean logic

equations known as the Application Data (Vital PROM Data and the Non-
vital Configuration).
Software Tools
The GCS and CS software tools comprise several software packages that
run on a Personal Computer (PC). This software assists Signalling Engi-
neers when designing, modifying and validating a WESTRACE installa-
tion. It also provides version control and verification of the Application
Data which is particular to a WESTRACE installation.

Chapter 2–WESTRACE, WESTECT and Safety
WESTRACE
2.1.2 WESTRACE Philosophy

WESTRACE is a safety critical processor based system intended for use
as a railway signalling interlocking.
It:
• meets world standard safety levels (SIL4);
• features modularity;
• is easy to maintain;
• is robust, and;
• has cost advantages over conventional interlockings.
The system encompasses all of these features but safety is foremost.
2.1.3 Safety Methodology
2.1.3.1 General
WESTRACE equipment is suitable for safety critical applications. The

general principle of system operation is to use two diverse methods of
processing to ensure correct operation with respect to vital functions.
This principle is implemented in both hardware and software processes
to maximise the operational safety of the system.
The diversity principle is applied in each WESTRACE module in many

ways, including:
• Storing all data as true and complement in two diverse forms;
• Utilising diverse true and complement data processing that is based
on differently structured code;
• Checking hardware against software and vice versa;
• Continually testing hardware;
• Proving the correct operation of the microprocessor by checking
against other modules in the system.
It is a primary safety requirement that all WESTRACE outputs are in ap-

propriate states defined by the combination of:
• System inputs;
• Internally stored states;
• The logical relationship of system inputs and internally stored states
as defined in the Application Data.
If WESTRACE detects an output in a state other than what is allowed by

the above, it will attempt to render the output safe. The first attempt tries
to positively disable the output but if the condition persists, the entire
system may then be disabled.
2.1.3.2 How WESTRACE Achieves Safety
WESTRACE achieves safety in the following manner:

• All Vital Modules continuously perform self-testing. The purpose is
to verify correct internal operation of the module. If a module detects
WESTECT
a problem within itself (or if the VLM detects a problem with a

module), immediate negation (shutdown) of the system will occur;
• All Vital Modules continuously perform testing on adjacent Vital
Modules to verify correct operation. This is known as Health
Monitoring. If a module detects a problem with a neighbouring
module it can immediately disable the entire system. For this reason,
a WESTRACE system must comprise at least three vital modules; the
VLM plus two other vital modules.
• All Vital data processing is performed by at least two diverse
software processes.
• All Vital data is stored in two diverse forms. In addition, vital logical
data is represented in a redundant manner within one of those forms.
• Failure of any system health check results in immediate system
shutdown.
The VLE:
• isolates all Vital Communications Modules by removing the Vital
Serial Enable Voltage (VSEV), and;
• de-energises the Output Power Control Relay (OPCR).
All Vital outputs of the system are thereby disabled and the
system is in a known and safe state.
A more detailed description of WESTRACE safety is in the WESTRACE

System Overview Manual.
2.2 WESTECT
2.2.1 What is WESTECT?

WESTECT is an ATP system for both trackside (encoder) and train-
carried sub-systems. It is also designed and manufactured by Westing-
house Rail Systems Australia.
WESTECT uses a WESTRACE system with a special communication

module and a radio system at key wayside locations (usually passing
loops). The WESTECT housing is maintained identically to a standard
WESTRACE system.
The additional wayside components of WESTECT covered by this

manual are:
• Radio communications hardware;
• Transponders;
• Maintenance support systems (eg Portable Radio Monitor, Portable
Transponder reader, transponder programmer).
WESTECT also uses passive transponders fixed to the sleepers that are
not included in this manual.
Software Tools
WESTECT uses design tools in addition to those used by WESTRACE to

develop transponder and radio data.

WESTECT
2.2.2 WESTECT Philosophy

WESTECT builds on the WESTRACE philosophy with an ATP system
that minimises any impact on driving within the safety constraints.
2.2.3 Safety Methodology

How WESTECT Achieves Safety
Each trackside mounted WESTECT encoder generates a data message

that is broadcast over the data radio system. The message is received by
WESTECT equipped trains within the radio coverage area. The track-
side data message is formulated and transmitted using WESTRACE prin-
ciples. The integrity of the message is ensured by the encoding and
decoding schemes and in no way relies on the radio data channel.
Further, each trackside encoder has a unique address that is validated
by the WESTECT equipped train before the message can be processed.
Track mounted transponders have a single message that is verified at

encoding and is again verified by the WESTECT equipped train at the
time of decoding. The WESTECT equipment carried by the train verifies
the integrity of the data by performing a Cyclic Redundancy Check
(CRC).
Chapter 3—System Description
Introduction
3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1 Introduction
There are more detailed descriptions of WESTRACE in the WESTRACE
System Overview Manual and WESTECT in the WESTECT System Over-
view Manual.
A WESTRACE interlocking takes inputs, logically processes them

according to application data provided by a signal engineer and safely
control vital serial or parallel outputs.
The WESTECT ATP Encoder takes information from the interlocking of

the state of main signal routes and converts this information in a
WESTRACE system into combined proceed authorities and route
entrance speeds which are broadcast by radio to all trains in the Encoder
area.
This chapter briefly reviews the WESTRACE system and describes the
particular wayside aspects of the WESTECT ATP system
3.2 WESTRACE System

WESTRACE is a modular vital interlocking system comprising modules,
housings and racks. System designers combine individual modules into
housings, housings into racks and may use multiple racks to build a total
interlocking system. Designers also provide application logic for each
rack and for communications between racks.
A multiple rack interlocking system:

• may be configured as a master-slave or peer-peer arrangement;
• will have communication links between the racks and usually to
local or remote control centres and to diagnostic systems;
Communication links are either Ethernet network or serial.
A rack can comprise one to four housings. Multiple housings are inter-
connected by special cables to extend the data bus (see Appendix A,
section A.21).
Each housing has provision for a single power supply. Each housing can
have its own power supply or special cables may be used to extend a
power supply from one housing (usually the top housing) to other hous-
ings. The number of power supplies fitted depends upon the power
requirements of the entire rack.
The top housing contains, by convention, contains;

• modules for vital logic processing (Vital Logic Module or VLM), and;
• optionally a non-vital logic processing and diagnostics module.

WESTRACE System
The VLM includes the:

• Vital Logic Card that is the systems central processing module;
• Output Power Card that is used to enable the modules’ interfaces
when the system is healthy;
• and in the case of the VLM1, a Configuration Element Card that it
fitted with PROMs holding the vital application data.
The cards that comprise the VLM are interconnected by an additional

motherboard known as the Vital Backplane Card.
WESTRACE systems can be built around different types of VLM, depend-

ent on the requirements of the interlocking design. Table 3.1 summarises
the cards and VBC required by each type of VLM (VLM6 is preferred).
Vital Logic Cards That Comprise the VLM Vital

Module Backplane
(VLM) Vital Logic Output Power Configuration Card
Card Card Element Card
VLM6 VLC6 OPC - UHVBC
VLM5 VLC5 OPC - HVBC

or UHVBC
HVLM128 HVLC OPC - HVBC

or UHVBC
VLM1 VLC OPC CEC VBC
Table 3.1: Vital Logic Module—Components
The VLM is always in the top housing. The remainder of the top housing
and any other housing can be populated with specific functional
modules. Each slot in the housing is physically identical but must be
fitted with module intended by the designer. The system will not
complete start up if the modules are not installed in their correct location
(or not installed at all). Vacant slots must be fitted with a blanker card.
When fitted the:

• DM module must occupy slot 15 of the top housing;
• NVC/DM or NCDM must be immediately adjacent to the VLM;
These modules comprise two cards and occupy two housing slots.
All external connections are through Protection and Filter Modules, or

PFMs. There is generally one PFM per module. The PFMs provide
secondary level filtering of conducted interference into and out of the
housings.
Modules available for a WESTRACE system include:

• Vital Logic Module (VLM6, VLM5, HVLM128 and VLM1);
• Network Communications Module (NCDM);
• Non-vital Communications and Diagnostic Module (NVC/DM);
• Diagnostic Module (DM1);
• Vital Telemetry Continuous Module (VTC and EVTC);
• Vital Parallel Input Module (VPIM1);
System Power Requirements
• Vital Relay Output Modules (VROM1);

• Vital Lamp Output Modules (VLOM1);
• WESTECT Communication Module (WCM). Used when WESTRACE
is part of a WESTECT system (see section 3.8);
• Protection and Filter Modules (PFM);
• Power Supply Unit (PSU).
These modules are discussed in Appendix A.
Please see reference [SOM] for further information about WESTRACE

housings.
3.3 System Power Requirements

Every WESTRACE system requires a 24 Vdc uninterruptable power
supply. This is usually taken from a float charged battery but may be
taken from a dc/dc converter from an existing communication battery or
other reliable source.
Most installations use separate power supply fuses for each housing
although there is not requirement to do so.
Note: The top housing must be powered up either at the same time as the
other housings or last.
Most WESTRACE systems require:

• 50 Vdc signalling supply to power VROM modules and to input to
VPIM modules;
• 110 Vac supply for the VLOM modules to power signalling lamps.
3.4 Output Power Control Relay (OPCR)

Every WESTRACE system that uses parallel output (VROM and VPIM)
must have a vital Output Power Control Relay (and optional repeat
relays) that will only provide power to the outputs when the system is
proved healthy (either by controlling power input or individual outputs
of the output modules).
Note: The power connection to these modules is shown on the system

circuits included in the equipment rooms.
Systems without parallel output may have a vital or non-vital Output

Power Control Relay that is used as part of an automatic restart circuit
after system shutdown.
1.
There are sub-variants of these modules.

Hot Stand-by
3.5 Hot Stand-by

WESTRACE systems may be stand alone or hot stand-by. Hot stand-by
allows for automatic, nearly uninterrupted, change over to the stand-by
system under manual command or triggered by on-line system failure.
Hot stand-by is always at a housing level. It requires two identical hous-

ings that are interconnected for fast data transfer and updates. It is quite
acceptable for some housings in a system to be hot stand-by and others to
be stand alone.
3.6 Vital Communication

WESTRACE can use vital communication between housings. This be
through serial links between EVTC or VTC modules or via an Ethernet
connection. Serial connections use identical cards at each rack. Ethernet
connection is always via the NCDM module in the top housing.
Ethernet Serial communication is enabled by the Vital Serial Enable

Voltage (VSEV) that is generated by the OPC when the system is deemed
healthy.
All serial data is sent redundantly and is checked for corruption. Suspect
messages are discarded. User viewable mnemonics show the state of the
communication links.
Serial links can only operate over short distances without conditioning.
Typically, serial link connections are:
• simple cable;
• PCM fibre optic telemetry, or;
• point to point modems.
These links may require special set up, including the line levels for
modems.
Ethernet would typically be connected to a local hub or switch, or to an

external network (routers, line interface, redundant links etc) to extend
beyond the location.
Refer to the system diagrams at the installation for the communication

architecture.
3.7 Non-vital Communications

WESTRACE can communicate to local or remote control centres and to
diagnostic systems via serial links or Ethernet.
Serial data links may be:

• directly connected locally;
• connected into a fibre optic PCM telemetry (typical), or;
• point to multi-point modem telemetry system for interface to a
WESTECT Encoders
control centre.
These links may require special setup and configuration.
Ethernet would typically be connected to a local hub or switch, or to an

external network (routers, line interface, redundant links etc) to extend
beyond the location.
Refer to the system diagrams at the installation for the communication

architecture.
3.8 WESTECT Encoders

WESTECT ATP is a specific extended application of WESTRACE. WEST-
ECT encoders may be a small standalone system or a combined inter-
locking and encoder.
A WESTECT encoder can use any of the modules for a standard

WESTRACE and must also contain a WESTECT Communication Module
(WCM). The WCM connects via a Radio Control Module (RCM) to a pair
of radios that broadcast movement and speed authorities to equipped
trains.
WESTRACE housings for WESTECT are only different in that they

contain the WCM. They use the same set up, configuration and fault find-
ing as a standard WESTRACE.
WESTECT extensions to WESTRACE are detailed in sections 3.8.1 and

3.8.2.
3.8.1 WESTECT Communication Module (WCM)

A vital serial send only data module with a message format specific to
WESTECT. The WCM passes the combined proceed authorities and
entrance speed in a synchronous serial format using RS232-C levels to
the Communications Rack.
3.8.2 Communications Rack

The Communications Rack is a 3RU 19 inch housing that contains the
following equipment:
• Radio Control Module—RCM;
• Duplicated Radios (Tait or Motorola).
Radio Control Module (RCM)—takes the serial data message from the
WCM and modulates and switches it between the two radios which trans-
mit alternatively at approximately 1 second intervals.
Duplicated Radios—two radios increase the availability of the system.

WESTECT Remote Radio Installations
3.9 WESTECT Remote Radio Installations

At some sites, the communications rack and antennas are located remote
from the interlocking and encoder to achieve the required radio cover-
age. This is achieved by having a communications rack with only radios
at the transmit site and a separate RCM in a 2Q wide rack mounted box,
connecting using either an RS232 or RS422 serial link. No other differ-
ence exists in these installations.
3.10 WESTECT Adjacent Interlockings

At some locations, multiple interlockings have been combined with a
single WESTECT Encoder area. A standard WESTECT Encoder installa-
tion is provided at the interlocking where the antennas are located. This
installation receives route data from the adjacent interlocking. The
signal route at proceed information is input from the interlocking and
transmitted to the WESTECT Encoder.
Chapter 4—System Configuration
Vital Telemetry
4. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter lists the module and equipment configurations for replace-
ment components.
4.1 Vital Telemetry

Modems may require configuration changes. See the S2 manuals.
4.2 Radio Frequency

The frequencies used by radios controlled by the WCM may need to be
adjusted.
4.3 Configurable Modules

The following modules require configuration:
See Appendix A,
page:
Vital Logic Module (VLM6) A-2
Hot Standby Vital Logic Module (HVLM128) A-33
Network Communication Diagnostic Module (NCDM) A-92
Non-vital Communications and Diagnostic Module (NVC/DM) A-125
Non-vital Communications Module (NVC) A-151
Diagnostic Module (DM) A-159
Diagnostic Module 128 (DM128) A-164
Installation specific configuration information may be identified in the

installation specific schematics kept in the signal equipment room.
4.4 Installation Addresses

Each location will have a specific installation address. Refer to the instal-
lation GCSS documentation for the address kept in the signal equipment
room.

Chapter 4—System Configuration
Installation Addresses
Chapter 5—WESTRACE Operating
Characteristics
Start Up Sequence
5. WESTRACE OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
This chapter describes WESTRACE system operating characteristics in

detail.
5.1 Start Up Sequence

Figures 5.1 to 5.4 illustrate the events in a typical WESTRACE system
start up sequence for each type of VLM.
The VLM and all the system modules perform self-tests and health
checks when powered up. These tasks take approximately 16 seconds to
complete.
If the initialisation tests fail: The Diagnostic LEDs on the faulty

module and fault codes captured by the
Diagnostic Module will identify the
faulty module.
Upon satisfactory completion: The VLM sets its serial and parallel vital
outputs according to the initialisation
data (defined by the Application Engi-
neer using GCSS or CSS).
The OPC relay (OPCR) is energised and

the initialisation outputs are sent to the
controlled equipment.
Generally, in a railway signalling application, all outputs are set to 0 (de-

energised), with the exception of red signal lamps which are required to
be set to 1 (energised). The red signal lamps must be ON at initialisation
because the red retention applied by de-energising the OPCR will be lost
before processed outputs are enabled.
As the OPCR energises, the VSEV output of the OPC also energises,
enabling the telemetry modules to communicate over serial channels.
The system ‘Application Delay’ (user configurable time delay) allows the
system to read all inputs, stabilise all internal logic states, and calculate
output states as defined in the Application Data.
When the Application Delay expires, the system commences ‘Normal

Working’ and all output modules are permitted to operate normally.
Note: Module watchdog LEDs do not flash synchronously.

Characteristics
Start Up Sequence
Figure 5.1: Start-up Timeline—HVLM128—Typical
Characteristics
Start Up Sequence
Figure 5.2: Start-up Timeline—VLM5—Typical

Characteristics
Start Up Sequence
Figure 5.3: Start-up Timeline—VLM6—Standalone—Typical
Characteristics
Start Up Sequence
Figure 5.4: Start-up Timeline—VLM6—Hot Stand-by—Typical

Characteristics
Normal Working
5.2 Normal Working
5.2.1 LEDs
During the Application Delay and Normal Working periods, only module
watchdog LEDs, the Power Supply (PSU) module LEDs and the NVC/DM
or NVC Tx/Rx LEDs should be illuminated.
Note: Module watchdog LEDs should flash green and the HVLC LED
should flash yellow.
NVC/DM or NVC Tx and Rx LEDs flash whenever communications
occur.
NCDM Ethernet Tx/Rx and serial port 2 & 3 Tx/Rx LEDs flash
whenever communications occur.
PSU module LEDs should be steady red to indicate that all power
rails are healthy.
Fault Indication
For modules other than the NVC/DM or NCDM, any red LED displayed
on the front of the module (other than the power and communications
LEDs) indicates a fault has occurred.
The NVC/DM or NCDM red watchdog LED indicates correct operation

while in the Maintenance Mode.
5.2.2 Graceful Degradation

WESTRACE may continue operating after disabling or ignoring individ-
ually faulty inputs or outputs. The remainder of the system continues
operating with suspect inputs assumed to be low and disabled outputs
low (or off). There is no indication of this on the LEDs.
A fault will be logged when this occurs but the relevant mnemonics (see
section 7.4) may not be set if the system has restarted or if there have
been multiple faults.
You will need to carefully examine the logs and may need to compare
actual and internal input and output states to confirm such degradation.
5.2.3 OPCR Exercise

Most WESTRACE systems will be designed to automatically test (we
term it exercise) the OPCR every couple of days.
Application logic is normally written to run this test when there are no
trains in the system. However the test will be run anyway when those
conditions are not met within an acceptable time. These conditions will
be shown in the application logic.
Characteristics
Normal Working
The OPCR test will de-energise the OPCR until the back contacts of the
relay and any repeat relays have been proven made. The OPCR will then
be re-energised.
The test will turn off all outputs and put red retaining signals to stop for
a short time, typically a couple of hundred milliseconds.

Characteristics
Normal Working
Chapter 6—Maintenance
Equipment Handling
6. MAINTENANCE
WESTRACE is Safety Critical equipment so safe operation of the Rail-

way depends upon its correct operation. Therefore it is essential that any
fault or loss of reliability be fully investigated before safety is threatened.
All maintenance of WESTRACE equipment must take account of the

relevant system design documentation.
This chapter describes the maintenance requirements.
6.1 Equipment Handling
WESTRACE equipment must not be controlling a railway with the

equipment covers removed because external electrical noise may be
introduced that could adversely affect the safe working of the
WESTRACE system (typically relays, radios and mobile phones).
WESTRACE equipment must not be modified, or tampered with in
any way. Return all faulty modules to Westinghouse Rail Systems
Australia for repair.
Failure to observe the safety warnings in this chapter may compro-
mise railway safety with resultant endangering of life and possible
equipment damage.
6.1.1 Anti-Static Protection

WESTRACE system modules contain static sensitive devices.
You must:
• keep all spare modules in anti-static packaging before installation.
Modules fitted with batteries may require special packaging;
• use appropriately grounded earthing mats to prevent damage to
equipment;
• wear conductive wrist straps when handling modules;
• avoid wearing clothing made of synthetic fabric when handling
modules. Cotton overalls are preferred.
6.1.2 Packing
All plug-in modules and cards shall be packaged in anti-static packaging
to prevent damage to Electro Static Sensitive Devices (ESSD) from elec-
trostatic discharge.

Equipment Handling
A module can be made static-safe by putting it in an anti-static bag or

enveloping it in anti-static wrap. When so packed, the module may be
stored and transported without further precaution.
The packaging must protect the equipment from all likely environments.
Modules with Batteries
Observe the instructions under Handling Lithium Batteries—Packaging

on page 6-3.
6.1.3 Storage
WESTRACE modules and cards in storage:
• Must not be in close proximity to magnets, eg Advanced Warning
System (AWS) magnets;
• Must be protected from damage due to electrostatic discharge;
• Must be protected from the environment including physical handling
damage.
If many modules are involved, it is permissible to use conductive card

frames, or racks. However connectors and pins will be exposed and must
not be touched because they may not be static safe. For this reason,
frames and racks should only be considered a temporary measure. Bags
and wraps are preferred.
6.1.4 Transport
Take into consideration the following factors when determining the
method of transport used and precautions taken:
• The protection provided by the packaging;
• WESTRACE equipment or modules must not be transported in close
proximity to magnets, eg AWS magnets;
• Observe the instructions under Handling Lithium Batteries—
Transport on page 6-3.
6.1.5 Lithium Batteries

The following modules have Lithium Batteries installed:
• WESTRACE Diagnostic Modules DM and DM128;
• WESTRACE Network Communications Module (NCDM);
• WESTRACE Non-vital Communications and Diagnostic Module
(NVC/DM);
• WESTECT Diagnostic Logging Module (DLM);
• WESTECT Train Protection Modules (TPMA and TPMB).
Handling Lithium Batteries
Under normal operating conditions, lithium batteries are safe. However

the following should always be observed.
Power Up and Down
Packaging
Package all modules with batteries in a non-conductive anti-static bag.

An electrically conductive bag may short the battery terminals causing
premature discharge of the battery.
Transport
The carriage of Lithium Batteries by air is subject to the latest edition

of the International Civil Aviation Organisation (I.C.A.O.) document
‘Technical Instructions For The Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by
Air’ 9248-AN/905.
Damage
The electrolyte lithium batteries contain is highly corrosive. If a

battery is damaged:
• ensure unnecessary personnel do not enter the affected area;
• ventilate the immediate area;
• avoid contact with any liquid or internal components by wearing
the appropriate safety equipment;
• thoroughly wash the affected area with clean water and allow to
dry.
Any electronic modules that may have been in contact with the electro-
lyte should be packaged with an appropriate safety warning and be
returned to Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia for inspection.
Disposal
Dispose of the battery according to any local regulations.
Do not:
• short the terminals together;
• attempt to recharge;
• crush;
• disassemble;
• incinerate or heat above 100°C (212°F);
• attempt to solder the cell.
6.2 Power Up and Down

B24 Supply
A housing may be powered down by the removal of the B24 fuse or
negative terminal pin.
For a multi-housing WESTRACE installation with separate fuses for
each housing:
• Powering down
Switch the top housing off first. The other housings can be
switched off in any order.
Wait at least 40 seconds before powering up.

Service
• Powering up
Switch the top housing on last. The other housings can be
switched on in any order.
Caution: Incorrectly powering up or down may:

• Cause the display of system fault codes;
• Prevent system restart.
6.3 Service
6.3.1 Routine Maintenance
6.3.1.1 Connections & Cable
Regularly carry out normal continuity checks on the cables and connec-
tions. Do not perform these tests while the cables are connected to elec-
tronic equipment.
6.3.1.2 Earthing
Regularly measure and improve system earthing if above 15Ω. Ideally

the earth impedance should be below 5Ω.
6.3.1.3 Power Supply
Regularly check the B24 supply to ensure it is within these limits:

• 24 Vdc nominal
• 20 Vdc minimum trough;
• 30 Vdc maximum peak (including ripple and noise).
6.3.1.4 Operating Environment
Maintain the working environment of the WESTRACE equipment

adequately clean such that conductive debris does not accumulate. A
wrong side failure may result from a short circuit caused by an accumu-
lation of conductive debris.
6.3.1.5 Exercise OPCR
Manually exercise (that is, de-energise and re-energise) the OPCR where
this is not performed automatically as part of the application logic
(strongly preferred).
At the specified intervals:

a) Obtain permission from the Signaller and adhere to the railway
authority’s safety requirements;
b) Remove power to housing1;
Service
c) Verify OPCR and all aspects de-energise;

d) Restore power to housing1 after 40 seconds.
e) Verify correct operation;
f) Return control to the Signaller.
6.3.1.6 Replace Lithium Battery
Replace lithium batteries according to the following schedule:
Replacement Interval WESTRACE Modules
5 years NCDM, NVC/DM, DM and DM128
6.3.2 Downloading Non-vital Configuration to NVLM

ICS version 6.2 (and higher) can be used download the Non-vital Config-
uration from an image file created by GCSS (6.2 and higher) directly to an
NVC/DM or NCDM. See reference [ICS] for details.
6.3.3 Replacement of Faulty Modules
This is a safety system. Replacement modules must be the same or a

later issue than the module being removed.
Observe the anti-static precautions outlined in section 6.1.1 when

handling WESTRACE modules.
Read sections 7 and 7.1 before commencing this procedure.

a) Use the Faulty Equipment Return Form (Appendix I) to record the
fault codes on display when you first examine the WESTRACE
installation;
Decode each fault code and determine which module is indicating an
unhealthy state;
b) Obtain permission from the Signaller and adhere to the railway
c) Remove system power (B24). Observe the requirements of section
6.2;
d) Reinstate system power (B24). Observe the requirements of section
6.2;
Note: This simple expedient can fix some apparent faults.
If fault codes reappear after step d:

e) Look for the first module to show fault codes before all the other
modules. This module is likely to be the cause of the problem;

Service
f) Compare the fault codes with those recorded in step a. Expect to see
the same codes recorded in step a. Record any changes on another
form;
g) Remove system power (B24);
h) Remove signalling supply(s);
i) Remove the conductive covers from the front of the affected
housing(s);
j) Remove the module by levering it from the housing using the built-
in ejection levers or use the WESTRACE module ejection tool. See
page page A-131;
k) Identify the replacement module and verify it complies with module
issue requirements for the installation;
Refer to the circuit book in the Signal Equipment Room;
l) Adjust the configuration of the replacement as required for the
installation;
Refer to the circuit book in the Signal Equipment Room and the
appropriate section of Appendix A;
m) Insert the replacement module;
Avoid forcing a module when inserting it into a housing. Ensure
that the PFM mates correctly with the module’s lower connector;
Check for shorts between adjacent pins on the output connector
after replacing a VROM module. This must be done before the
system can be considered safe;
Perform this check by testing for short circuits between all pins on
the PFM with a multimeter. Do not use a high voltage tester (eg
Megger) for this short circuit test;
n) Replace the system housing covers and apply power to the system.
Observe the requirements of section 6.2.
Only hand the WESTRACE system back to the controlling authority

after it has successfully energised the OPCR and normal operation has
commenced.
6.3.4 Replacement of PFMs
This is a safety system. Replacement modules must be the same or

later issue than the module being removed.

b) Remove system power (B24). Observe the requirements of section
6.2;
c) Remove signalling supply;
d) Disconnect PFM external connection plugs;
Disposal
e) Remove PFM by unscrewing the 2 mounting screws fixing the PFM

to the rear of the housing;
f) Insert a replacement PFM and fix all mounting screws. Ensure that
the PFM mates correctly with the module’s lower connector;
g) Reconnect the PFM external connection plugs ensuring that the
correct plug is inserted in the associated socket;
h) Check PFM external connecting plug labels and ensure that the
external connections are correct;
i) Remove the conductive housing covers from the front of the affected
housing(s);
j) Check that the module associated with the replaced PFM is seated
correctly;
k) Replace the system housing covers and apply power to the system.
Observe the requirements of section 6.2.
Only hand the WESTRACE system back to the controlling authority

after it has successfully energised the OPCR and normal operation has
commenced.
6.3.5 Module Repair

Module repair must only be carried out in a fully equipped repair facil-
ity.
a) Place a suspected faulty module in anti-static packaging after
removal from a system;
b) Properly complete the Faulty Equipment Return Form (see
Appendix I);
c) Returned the faulty module and completed Faulty Equipment
Return Form to Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia for testing
and repair.
6.3.6 Reporting of WESTRACE Faults

Report any WESTRACE Equipment fault in writing to the Manager,
Signalling Systems, Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia, 179–185
Normanby Road, South Melbourne, Victoria 3205, Australia.
6.3.7 Return to Service after Maintenance

Return WESTRACE equipment to service in an orderly and safe manner
adhering to local rules.
6.4 Disposal
Carefully consider the role and functions performed by the WESTRACE
System when replacing it with other equipment. For example; the system
may be operating in safety mode, perhaps as an interlocking. Thus take
extreme care during the change over to ensure that an unsafe set of

Disposal
circumstances cannot arise. This requirement might involve the

WESTRACE System operating in parallel with its successor.
The relationship between reliability and safety is most important

because WESTRACE equipment may be used in a fail-safe role. Typi-
cally, safety is considered to be proportional to reliability squared (ie
safety ∝ reliability2). This means safety will decline rapidly as reliability
decreases through ageing of components.
The life expectancy of WESTRACE equipment is approximately 20 years

and it may ultimately become unreliable. It must be replaced when life-
expired and not be kept in service with degraded reliability.
Chapter 7—Fault Conditions and Errors
Reading Fault Codes
7. FAULT CONDITIONS AND ERRORS
WESTRACE generates and logs a fault for every test and check that fails.
Most fault error codes are displayed on the LEDs or alphanumeric
display on the modules, but only one fault can be displayed by each
module. You can read all logged faults from the diagnostic module using
one of the utility PC programs.
WESTRACE’s diverse safety architecture uses multiple and different

methods to verify modules are healthy and shuts the system down when
vital modules cannot be guaranteed to be operating safely. A vital
module can be shut down by:
• its own self tests;
• the tests executed on it by either of its vital neighbours, or;
• the test executed by the VLM.
Once one vital module is shut down, its neighbours will notice that it is
not working and will also shut down, generating their own fault code.
Thus if one module fails for any reason, all vital modules will display a
fault code. There are three fault codes generated in this sympathetic shut
down that indicate a fault on another module:
01H: Second Negation Error

2DH: Health Monitoring Time Error
2EH: Health Monitoring Health Error
7.1 Reading Fault Codes

Faults within WESTRACE generate fault codes. These fault codes are
indicated by:
• Fault diagnostic LEDs on the front of a module;
• Alphanumeric display on the NVC/DM or NCDM;
• The MoviolaW Fault Window.
MoviolaW provides some additional fault codes for some modules, for
example, recovery from NVC/DM or NCDM faults.
A fault code indicated by the Fault Diagnostic LEDs or alphanumeric

display on the front of a module is applicable to that particular module.
The alphanumeric display shows the error code whereas the pattern of
lit Fault Diagnostic LEDs has to interpreted to determine the error code.
All Fault Diagnostic LEDs are read in the same manner.

Reading Fault Codes
{
1 Least Significant Bit
Lower 2
Read the LEDs in this direction

byte
4
8 Most Significant Bit
{
1 Least Significant Bit
Upper 2
byte
4
8 Most Significant Bit
Watchdog Green Watchdog LED

(Flashing)
Figure 7.1: Fault Diagnostic LEDs
Each module has two groups of four LEDs to indicate a fault code
comprising two bytes. The upper byte is the first (left) character of a
Hexadecimal fault code and the lower byte is the second character. An
LED represents 1 when illuminated and 0 when not illuminated.
The example in figure 7.1 is displaying 1101 1000 (reading bottom to top)
which represents D8H (where H means hexadecimal).
Figure 7.2 shows the 16 patterns a group of four vertical LEDs can indi-
cate. Each pattern represents a particular character and these are shown
also.
Use the information in figure 7.2 to read the fault code displayed by Fault
Diagnostic LEDs on the front of a module. Remember, the lower four
LEDs represent the first (left) character and the upper four the second
character in the Hexadecimal error code.
Hex character 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
ON = 1
Legend
OFF = 0
Figure 7.2: Fault Diagnostic LEDs—Reading
Fault codes and their applicable meaning for individual WESTRACE

modules are in Appendix A. Usually, the faulty module displays its error
code before the rest of the modules display their codes. The timing is very
quick and may be difficult to observe in a large WESTRACE system.
Fault Finding
7.2 Fault Finding

WESTRACE is part of an overall signalling system. Do not assume that
the fault is in WESTRACE and not in some other part of the system.
Try and validate all reports of reports of faults that you may receive.
People can be unreliable in observing and reporting what actually
happened. Use actual measurements and recorded history as one avenue
for validating fault reports.
Use the flow chart on page 7-4 as a quick reference for identifying system
faults. In most cases the chart will help you arrive at satisfactory solu-
tion to a first-line maintenance problem.
Continually be alert for situations where the initiating fault is masked

by subsequent and unrelated faults and error codes. The Diagnostic
Module polls the other WESTRACE modules in turn to read initialisa-
tion information such as fault codes and it only stores changes to the
information. The Diagnostic Module stores the changes it sees first, and
since it polls each of the modules in turn, the stored change may not be
the first that occurred.
Systems with intermittent faults can be difficult to diagnose. Record

every action you take and every change you make as you seek the source
of the fault.
Faulty modules should be returned to Westinghouse Rail Systems

Australia for testing and repair.

Fault Finding
See figure 7.4
Figure 7.3: Fault Finding Flow Chart (Part 1)
Fault Finding
See figure 7.3
See figure 7.5
See figure 7.5

Fault Finding
See figure 7.4
See figure 7.4
Faults During Start-Up
7.3 Faults During Start-Up

Some faults may prevent completion of the start up sequence described
in section 5.1. Diagnose the problem logically, using this section as a
guide. In each case, confirm that step a did or didn’t fix the problem
before moving to step b etc.
PSU does not display all red LEDs
No LEDs are illuminated:

a) Verify that B24 power is available at the external PSU PFM
connector.
b) Replace the PSU if 24 V power is available.
24 V power is present but power rail LEDs are not illuminated:

a) Remove all modules from system housing and determine whether
the fault lies in:
• the PSU, or
• a system module.
b) Replace the offending module.
All Modules display all LEDs
All the modules are displaying the Fault Code FFH:

a) Ensure the PSU is fitted correctly.
b) Replace the PSU if the fault persists.
Module Faults
One module fails to flash its watchdog as other modules start up, and
subsequently an error code is displayed by the Fault Diagnostic LEDs.
a) Switch system power off (B24) and wait 40 seconds before re-
applying the power.
b) Replace the offending module with a known working spare and
repeat step a.
Usually, the module that first displays an error code is the faulty one.

Faults During Start-Up
OPCR Faults
The VLC displays the error code DCH indicating insufficient ‘power off’
time (for the OPC card) may have elapsed prior to switching the system
on.
a) Switch the B24 supply to the PSU and the OPC off, wait at least 40
seconds and power on again;
Take the following steps if the error persists:

b) Check the OPCR is correctly wired from the OPC card and that the
relay is functional. Replace if necessary and repeat step a;
c) Verify the OPC and VLC cards are correctly inserted. Correct if
necessary and repeat step a;
d) Replace the OPC card with a known working OPC card and repeat
step a;
e) Replace the VLC card with a known working VLC card and repeat
step a.
VLM Faults
Identify error codes on all modules including VLC.
After replacing Application Logic PROMs (CED PROMs with the correct
version CED installed):
a) Ensure that version switches are correct and PROMs are located in
correct sockets. Refer to the GCSS installation specific printouts;
For older VLM1 cards, these switches and PROMs are located on the
CEC card;
For newer VLMs, these switches and PROMs are located on the VLC
card (there is no CEC card);
Installing incorrect, invalid, or otherwise corrupted PROM data will
prevent the system from operating.
Try the following if the error persists:

a) Switch system power off (B24) and after waiting 40 seconds, attempt
a restart;
b) Verify the OPC and VLC cards are correctly inserted. Correct if
necessary and repeat step a;
c) Replace the OPC card with a known working OPC card and repeat
step a;
d) Replace the VLC card with a known working VLC card and repeat
step a.
NVLM Faults
See Appendix A, section A.11.6.6 for NCDM faults and section A.12.6.6 for
NVC/DM.
Faults During Normal Working
Note: Neither NVC/DM or NCDM will start if the CED version is not
correct.
Start-up sequence not complete
The top housing (containing the VLM) must be powered up at the same
time, or later than all other housings.
Fit the fuse or link to the top housing last when each housing has a sepa-
rate fuse or link.
7.4 Faults During Normal Working

Faults may arise during normal working of a system. They may be minor
system faults, or faults leading to system negation.
Determine the status of suspected faults or other conditions by interro-

gating the diagnostic module. Do this using MoviolaW or the Diagnostic
Module Logging Package.
See:
• Appendix B — Diagnostic Module Technician Interface;
• Appendix C — Diagnostic Module Logging Package;
• Appendix D — MoviolaW;
• Appendix E — GETLOG Utility;
• Appendix F — NGETLOG Utility.
Clear the fault log after fixing a fault.
The following paragraphs provide some guidance. In each case, make

sure that the current step has not corrected the problem before proceed-
ing to the next.
Module shuts down
One module shuts down (fails to flash its watchdog) and displays an error
code on the Fault Diagnostic LEDs. Other modules also stop functioning
and display an error code. OPCR is de-energised.
Follow the procedure described in section 6.3.3.
OPCR de-energises and no error codes are displayed on modules
Power down and replace the VLC or HVLC and OPC cards (one at a time).
Restart and check operation.
A re-occurrence of the fault is likely to be a backplane problem and

replacement may be necessary.

Vital Relay or Vital Lamp output(s) are not energised
Vital Relay or Vital Lamp output(s) should be energised but are not.
Modules show no error codes and continue to operate normally. This
may be apparent by a relay not energising or a signal aspect not illumi-
nating when required.
Check the following:

a) Read the actual state of the WESTRACE output by connecting a
voltmeter to the appropriate PFM terminals. The fault is external to
WESTRACE if this voltage is correct;
b) Verify the intended state of the WESTRACE output by reading the
associated mnemonic from the Diagnostic terminal, MoviolaW,
GETLOG or NGETLOG;
(‘1’ is on. ‘0’ is off)
Any difference between the intended and actual states suggests the
fault is in the module or the PFM. However, a module fault could
have been caused by an external fault;
c) Check the diagnostic module for a PIOFLT;
A PIOFLT is generated when a module blows an internal fuse to
protect against a suspected faulty output;
Replace this module, restart and check WESTRACE. PIOFLT (and
FAULT) will reset when the system is restarted;
d) Check the output fuse. It might have blown;
e) Check the signalling supply to the module;
The VLOM B50 must be smoothed and within specified limits.
Correct as necessary;
f) Disconnect the cable from the PFM;
Use a multimeter to check on the PFM plug for unintended voltages,
ground faults or short circuits on the external circuit. Correct as
appropriate;
g) Replace the module, restart and check WESTRACE;
h) Replace the PFM, restart and check WESTRACE;
i) Label faulty module and return to Westinghouse Rail Systems
Australia as described in section 6.3.5;
j) Clear the fault log.
Vital Parallel Input Module energised but not recognising input
Vital Parallel Input Module input is energised, but system does not
recognise energised state. Module shows no error codes and continues to
operate normally.
Disabled VPIM inputs are typically caused by transient over-voltages on

the external circuits.
Execute as necessary to rectify the fault:

a) Read the actual state of the WESTRACE input by connecting a
voltmeter to the appropriate PFM terminals;
b) Verify the interpreted state of the WESTRACE input by reading the

associated mnemonic from the Diagnostic terminal;
(‘1’ is on. ‘0’ is off)
Any difference between the interpreted and actual states suggests
the fault is in the module or the PFM. However, a module fault could
have been caused by an external fault. Correct as necessary;
c) Disconnect the cable from the PFM;
Use a multimeter to check on the PFM plug for unintended voltages
and ground faults Correct as appropriate;
d) Check the surge arrester for damage for electrical failure. Replace as
necessary;
e) Replace the module, restart and check WESTRACE;
f) Replace the PFM, restart and check WESTRACE;
g) Label faulty module and return to Westinghouse Rail Systems
h) Clear the fault log.
Loss of Input or Output Channel on a EVTC Module

a) Inspect the status of the vital signal channels at both the sending and
receiving WESTRACE by reading the state of the #LOOC and #LOIC
mnemonics (# = channel number (0-7));
• #LOIC = 0 indicates valid data is not being received;
• #LOOC = 0 indicates valid data is not being sent;
b) Deduce whether the fault is in the communication channel. Inspect
communication channels, including cables, modems, power supply
line protection, and correct communication faults;
c) Replace the module, restart and check WESTRACE;
d) Replace the PFM, restart and check WESTRACE;
e) Label faulty module and return to Westinghouse Rail Systems
f) Clear the fault log.
Non-vital communication faults
There may be several non-vital communication channels. These may not

all be active at the one time. Study the system diagrams and ascertain
that you do have a problem with an active communication channel.
a) Observe the flash rate of the communication indicating LEDs;
NVC/DM
• Rx LED is not flashing. This indicates that no data is being
received by this channel. Check the telemetry line, modem,
power supplies, line protection etc;
• Tx LED is not flashing. This indicates that the module is not

receiving valid data for its assigned S2 address. Check the

telemetry line, modem, power supplies, line protection etc;
NCDM
• Double LED (D5) is not flashing. This Green/Red LED (see figure
A.31) indicates the status of the Ethernet connection. Green not
flashing indicates the transceiver is not receiving data. Red not
flashing indicates the transceiver is not transmitting data. Check
the Ethernet connection, the NCD PFM etc;
• Double LEDs (D6 & D7) not flashing. These Green/Red LEDs (see
figure A.31) indicate the status of serial ports 2 and 3 respectively.
Green not flashing indicates the serial port is not receiving data.
Red not flashing indicates the serial port is not transmitting data.
Check the serial connections, the NCD PFM etc;
b) Inspect for any module fault codes (NVC/DM or NCDM fault codes
may be read from the front alphanumeric display; DM fault codes
must be read from the diagnostic interface;
c) Replace the module, restart and check WESTRACE;
d) Replace the PFM, restart and check WESTRACE;
e) Label faulty module and return to Westinghouse Rail Systems
f) Clear the fault log.
Network Communication Faults
Network faults may be to do with the network port (see Appendix A,

section A.11.6.7.1) or the with one of the communications sessions (see
section A.11.6.7.2).
Chapter 8—WESTECT Communication
Equipment—Fault Finding
Introduction
8. WESTECT COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT—

FAULT FINDING
8.1 Introduction
The communication system is described in Appendix H.
The communication components may be installed in a single housing or

the radios and antennae may be separated from the encoder and remote
RCM. Maintenance technicians should determine which arrangement is
used prior to attempting fault finding.
The first-line maintenance level of this system it limited to:

• WCM Module—refer to Chapter 7 of this manual;
• Radios—detection of faults and replacement of complete radios;
• RCM—(either individual module where it is installed in a
communication housing or the complete unit where the remote RCM
is used) detection of faults and replacement of the complete module.
The circuit boards should not be separated;
• Wiring—detection and correction of faults;
• Antenna and Cabling—detection and correction of faults.
8.2 Equipment
The following equipment may be necessary:
• WESTECT Portable Radio Monitor;
• WESTECT ATP Portable Radio Monitor User Manual;
• 420 MHz reflected power meter;
• Digital multimeter;
• Hand tools.
8.3 System
8.3.1 Fault Finding

Figure 8.1 shows the general fault finding process.
The initial testing of the system is performed with the Portable Radio
Monitor (PRM). Refer to the WESTECT ATP Portable Radio Monitor
User manual for details on use of this equipment.

System
(See Chapter 7)
Figure 8.1: General Fault Finding Process
Communication Housing Removal & Replacement
8.3.2 Power Supply

There are two power supplies used by the system.
B24 supply—used to supply the WESTECT encoder powers the RCM.
Check this supply to ensure that it is within the specified tolerance. See
section 6.3.1.3.
B12 supply—used to power the radios.
Measure the voltage on this supply while each radio is transmitting to

ensure it is within tolerance. Refer to the radio manuals for the allowed
tolerance on this voltage.
8.3.3 Connections & Cable

See section 6.3.1.1 for continuity checks.
A portable oscilloscope can be used to verify signals on the interfaces

between the WCM and RCM and the RCM and the radio.
8.3.4 Earthing
See section 6.3.1.2.
8.4 Communication Housing Removal & Replacement

Obtain possession before removing or replacing equipment.
Step Procedure
1. Ensure that the B12 and B24 power is off.

Unscrew the four screws that secure the communications
housing to the rack.
Identify then disconnect the cables from the terminal block
TSCOMMS. Disconnect the side earth strap from the
communications housing.
Disconnect the radio antenna plugs from the back of the
Lift the communications housing clear of the rack.
2. Fit the replacement communications housing into the

WESTECT cubicle.
Reconnect the cables to TSCOMMS connecting the
Secure to the rack using the screws removed during step 1.
Reconnect antennas.
3. Carry out the system serviceability test.
Table 8.1: Removal and Replacement—Communication

Housing

Radio & Control Module
8.5 Radio & Control Module
8.5.1 Checking
Checking of the RCM is initially performed using the status LEDs. Refer
to Appendix H for details of LED operation.
Further testing can be carried out with a portable oscilloscope or multi-

meter. This is limited to verification that the correct signals are present
on the input and output.
8.5.2 Removal & Replacement

Obtain permission from the Signaller and adhere to the railway author-
ity’s safety requirements.
Remove the Communication Housing as described in section 8.4.
Step Procedure
1. Remove the cover plate from the communications rack chassis,

disconnect all external cables attached to the RCM. Unbolt the
RCM from the chassis.
2. Install a replacement RCM. Secure the RCM to the chassis with

the bolts removed in Step 1, and reconnect the cables. Refit the
lid. Refit the cover plate and secure the cover plate in place.
3. Re-install the communications rack into the rack and connect

cables.
Table 8.2: Removal and Replacement—Radio and Control

Module
8.6 Radios
8.6.1 Checking
Checking of the Radio is performed by:
• checking of the input to the Radio from the RCM;
• checking of the transmit functions via the LEDs (Tait Radios only);
• checking for warmth of the radio indicating that the transmit
function is operating;
• removal of the data connector from the radio to prevent transmit.
Radios
8.6.2 UHF Radios—Removal Replacement

Refer to the WESTECT Train Carried Equipment First-line Maintenance
Manual when performing these procedures.
Step Procedure
1. a Remove the Communications Rack from the Cubicle;

b. Remove the top cover from the front of the Communications
Rack housing.
2. a Remove the cover plate from the Communications Rack Chassis;

b. Carefully disconnect the cables attaching Radio2 and the Reader
Logic Board (RLB) to the Communications Rack Chassis.
Table 8.3: Removal and replacement—UHF Radios
When Radio 1 is faulty:
Step Procedure
3. Disconnect all external cables to the radio.
4. Clyde and 2800 Class locomotives (Motorola radios)

a Open cover to the radio using an Allen Key;
b. Unbolt Radio 1 from the chassis and remove radio.
Tilt Trains, 2600 and 2800 Class Locos No: 2840–2849 (Tait radios)
a Slide radio removal keys on both sides of the front panel to dis-
connect the radio from the housing;
b. Move radio forward and out of the housing.
5. Clyde and 2800 Class locomotives (Motorola radios)

a Bolt the replacement Radio 1 to the chassis;
b. Close cover to the radio;
Slide replacement radio into the housing.
6. a Reconnect all external cables to the radio;

b. Fit the lid to the chassis;
c. Reconnect cables to the lid.
7. Carry out the System Serviceability Test.
Table 8.4: Removal and replacement—UHF Radios—Radio 1

Faulty

Antenna System
When Radio 2 is faulty:
Step Procedure
8. Clyde, 2300 and 2800 Class locomotives (Motorola radios)

After removing the lid:
a Disconnect the external cables attaching the lid to the chassis:
b. Turn the lid over to expose Radio 2 and the RLB;
c. Use an Allen Key to open the cover to the radio and unbolt the
radio from the lid;
d. Install the replacement radio:
e. Open the case and bolt the radio to the lid:
f. Reconnect the external cables to the radio and RLB and refit the
lid to the chassis;
g. Reconnect the external cables to the radio.
a Install the replacement radio;
b. Reconnect all external cables to the radio and fit the lid to the
chassis;
c. Re-attach the cables to the lid.
Table 8.5: Removal and replacement—UHF Radios—Radio 2

Faulty
8.7 Antenna System

The antenna system requires specialist equipment for complete testing
and checking. This will generally require the services of a communica-
tion technician and so full details are not included here.
Faults with the antenna or cable can lead to reduced coverage or total
loss of radio reception. This will often be indicated by a failure of only
one radio in the train log.
Check the antenna system:

• Visually inspect the cable, antenna mount and earthing;
Damaged cable or poor earthing should be corrected or replaced;
• Check also for any equipment that may have been installed on the
antenna mast after the initial installation and that may interfere
with the radio propagation;
• Measure the cable continuity to detect antenna connection and short
circuits. Correct any faults;
• Measure the forward and reflected power levels by inserting a
reflected power meter (eg BIRD Model 43 with appropriate element)
into the antenna cable;
Disconnect the RG213 and LDF450 cables and insert the meter
between them. The forward power should be consistent with the set
output of the transmitter (recorded on the ATP Radio Setup &
Configuration Checklist). The reverse power must be within a couple
of percent of zero. See figure 8.2 and figure 8.3;
Antenna System
A high reflected power usually indicates a poor connection in the

antenna cable or faulty antenna;
A low forward power usually indicates that the radio requires
adjustment. This is a specialist task for a communications
technician;
• Arrange for a communication technician to measure the received
signal strength and compare with that recorded at setup. Refer figure
8.3. A low received signal strength will reduce radio coverage. The
technician should correct radio or antenna faults to restore the
signal to the original level;
A rough indication of acceptable signal strength can be made by
comparing receive levels of both radios using the Portable Radio
Monitor (refer section 8.8.2).
Antenna
Radio RG213 LDF450
Transmitter
Pwr
Meter
Wall of enclosure
Figure 8.2: Reflected Power Meter—Inserting

Antenna System
Figure 8.3: ATP Radio Setup & Configuration Checklist
Verification of Transmissions
8.8 Verification of Transmissions
8.8.1 Data Checking

Checking the transmitted data would only be required where there was
an expectation that the encoder data may have been incorrectly
designed. This function would normally be performed by a Signal Engi-
neer.
The state of inputs and outputs can be determined using MoviolaW or the
Diagnostic Module Logging Package or GETLOG.
For information on using these tools, see:
• Appendix B — Diagnostic Module Technician Interface;
• Appendix C — Diagnostic Module Logging Package;
• Appendix D — MoviolaW;
• Appendix E — GETLOG Utility.
The site printouts show the logic used for generation of the WCM output
data.
The Portable Radio Monitor displays the entrance speeds for each route.
The data received on the PRM can be correlated against that expected for
the specific input combination. The operation of the PRM is described in
the WESTECT ATP Portable Radio Monitor User Manual.
8.8.2 Coverage
Adequate radio coverage should be obtained for all line sections extend-
ing from the Station Approach Signal transponder group in the Up direc-
tion to the Station Approach Signal transponder group in the Down
direction while also covering the whole station area.
Radio coverage can be checked using the Portable Radio Monitor (PRM).
The primary indication will be by receipt of correct messages on the

PRM. A high impedance volt meter can be connected to the monitor point
on the PRM. This output can be used to give an indication of received
signal strength.
The PRM can be moved through the coverage area and the received error
rate and the signal strength monitored.
Refer to the WESTECT ATP System Design Manual for assistance with
resolving radio coverage problems.

Verification of Transmissions
Chapter 9—WESTECT Transponders—Fault
Finding and Replacement
Introduction
9. WESTECT TRANSPONDERS—FAULT FINDING

AND REPLACEMENT
9.1 Introduction
This section details the first-line maintenance procedures for track
mounted transponders associated with the WESTECT ATP system.
First-line maintenance is limited to:

• Checking transponders for correct operation using Portable
Transponder Monitor (PTM) and a PC;
• Removal of faulty transponders;
• Programming new transponders using existing data base file,
programmer and printer;
• Reinstallation;
• Verification of installed transponders using transponder allocation
drawings.
9.2 Equipment
Equipment that may be required for this task includes:
• Portable transponder monitor (including PC);
• WESTECT ATP Portable Transponder Monitor User Manual;
• Safety equipment (refer to section 9.5);
• Transponder programmer (CTSS Remote, including PC, printer and
adhesive labels).
9.3 System
Transponders are individual components and only relate to the total
ATP system when read by trains. There is no system level testing appro-
priate.
9.4 Faulty Link Transponders

Faulty Link Transponders must be replaced immediately in Direct Traf-
fic Control (DTC) territory.
Immediate replacement is necessary because failure of a Link Trans-

ponder prevents the operation of incorrect route (wrong road) detection.

Personal Safety
9.5 Personal Safety

Transponders are installed in carriers and are mounted on sleepers
between rails. Personnel checking transponders using the Portable
Transponder Monitor must enter the track vicinity and will be vulnera-
ble to train movement.
You must observe the personal safety requirements of section 1.10.
9.6 Checking Transponders

Transponders are checked using the Portable Transponder Monitor
(PTM). Use of this equipment is described in the PTM manual.
Note: The PTM does not allow for recording the transponder
identification along with the data recorded from the transponder. It
is necessary to complete the transponder test form along with each
transponder tested. Each transponder in a group should be tested.
It is not always possible to correlate a reported error to a specific trans-

ponder within a group.
The most common failure modes are:

• transponder cannot be read, or;
• transponder can be read but with a loss of sensitivity.
It is possible that track gangs may have relocated transponders out of

position. It is extremely unlikely that data within the transponders will
have changed.
Each transponder carrier has an engraved plate with the unique identi-
fication of the transponder. This identification can be used for ascertain-
ing that the transponder has been installed in the correct location and
sequence by reference to the transponder allocation drawings, the Trans-
ponder Source File and the Transponder Group Summary printout.
The Portable Transponder Monitor will display the following data:

• Transponder data (not usually used);
• Transponder CRC;
• Transponder type;
• Transponder direction;
• Extremity;
• Transponder sequence number.
The Transponder CRC is the only data that must be checked against the
transponder group summary printout. A correct CRC check means that
all other fields are correct.
Programming
The other data is provided to assist users in the checking process.
Check that:
• The transponders are installed in the correct location according the
identity plate and the transponder allocation drawings;
• Each transponder in a group is in the correct sequence;
• That the first and last transponder of each group is set with the
extremity = Y;
• The CRC matches that on the source data for the specific
identification;
• the transponder is correctly mounted and is not damaged.
Any faulty or suspect transponder must be replaced with a newly

programmed transponder.
The PRM will only log the 100 most recently read transponders. These are
not cross referenced to the transponder identification. It is possible to
rename the log file to retain it for later use through DOS commands. The
log file must be renamed back to STORED.DAT for later viewing and print-
ing as they cannot be viewed using standard DOS commands.
9.7 Programming
Transponder programming is performed using the WESTECT Trans-
ponder Programmer and a PC with the CTSS-Remote software.
The operation of the equipment is described in the WESTECT ATP

Transponder Configuration Sub-System User Manual.
Note: It is essential the correct configuration procedures are maintained

that enforce the site data being kept up to date with the central data.
Transponders should be programmed and checked in accordance with

the procedures given in the manual. The sealing plug must be inserted
using the WRSA approved tools and adhesives. Transponders should
immediately be labelled.

Installation
9.8 Installation
Installation of transponders is described in Westinghouse Rail Systems
Australia work instruction WIS036. This document describes:
• Correct installation of transponder on Timber, Steel or Concrete
Sleepers;
• Correct location of Transponders with respect to signals and other
track features.
Note: Transponders must be installed at the correct location. Failure to do

so may inhibit the correct movement of trains.
9.9 Verification
Transponders should be verified using the Portable Transponder Moni-
tor after installation.
APPENDIX A—MODULE DESCRIPTIONS
This appendix describes:

• characteristics;
• function;
• operation;
• configuration, and;
• external connections;
of each WESTRACE module.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 A-1

Vital Logic Module (VLM6)
A.1 Vital Logic Module (VLM6)

All WESTRACE systems have a Vital Logic Module as its processing
core. The VLM6 is one of the Vital Logic Module types in service.
A WESTRACE Hot Standby system comprises a pair of fully duplicated

installations in a symmetrical arrangement, such that one installation is
in ‘on-line’ mode (in control of the railway), whilst the other is in
‘standby’ mode. Each installation has an VLM6 at the processing core
and the service provided by a particular installation is determined by
setting links on a backplane card.
A.1.1 VLM6 Description

The VLM6 comprises two printed circuit boards:
• VLC6 (Vital Logic Card);
• OPC (Output Power Card).
The individual boards are interconnected by means of the VLE back-

plane, and also by a Universal Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card
(UHVBC). Links on this card (CONF1 and CONF2) determine the service
provided by the particular WESTRACE installation as decribed in
section A.1.2.3.
A VLM6 occupies slots 2 to 3 in housing 1 of a WESTRACE installation.

The OPC is in Slot 2 and the VLC6 is in Slot 3. Slot 1 in housing 1 must have
a Blanker card inserted.
A.1.1.1 VLM6 Vital Logic Card (VLC6) Description
The VLC6 is the system's central processing module. It controls commu-

nications between the system modules and performs all Application
Logic processing to determine the current state of all vital and non-vital
outputs.
The VLC6 contains in PROM the Configuration Element Data (CED)

generated by the GCSS. It has configuration data version switches (SW1)
that it uses to ensure the CED in PROM is the correct version.
A-2 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
IC5 IC6
CED Code
High High
Byte Byte
PROM PROM VLE
Backplane
IC20 IC21
Connector
CED Code
Low Low
Byte Byte
PROM PROM
SW1
UHVBC
ON
1
ON Connector
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
OFF
6
ON
7
ON
8
OFF ON
Figure A.1: VLC6—Layout—VLM6
A.1.1.2 VLM6 Output Power Card (OPC) Description
The OPC produces power to drive the OPCR and VSEV. The VSEV
enables outputs for the vital communications modules and the OPC
isolates power from both of these outputs when safe operation of the
system cannot be guaranteed.

Description
The UHVBC is a small, half height, printed circuit board installed

directly behind the lower connectors of the VLM.
It provides:
• a direct connection between the OPC and VLC cards (HVLC, VLC5 or
VLC6), that constitute the VLM;
• 24 links (LK 1 to LK 24, see figure A.2) that determine the unique
physical address of the WESTRACE installation. The setting of these
links is checked against the data contained in the Application Data
PROMS, thereby preventing installation and execution of an
incorrect version of application data;
• 2 links (CONF1 & CONF2, see figure A.2 and table A1) that determine
the operation of the VLM. The setting of these links determines
whether the VLM is operating in Stand-alone or Hot Standby mode.
If it is in Hot Standby Mode they are also determine whether it is the
default On Line or Standby system;
• 2 links (LK 25 and LK 26, see figures A.2 and A.3, and table A1)
provide VSEV voltage to the VLC when these links are made.

Caution: Links LK 25 and LK 26 must be open if the UHVBC is used with an

HVLC or VLC5, otherwise the VSEV voltage may be shorted to ground.
Figure A.2: UHVBC—Rear Side View—VLM6
Note: CONF1 and CONF2 in figure A.2 correspond to J25 and J26 on the
GCSS Installation Report (figure A.3).
A.1.2 VLM6 Configuration
A.1.2.1 VLM6 Vital Logic Card (VLC6) Configuration
The CED is contained in two PROMs, a high byte and a low byte (see
figure A.1). The low byte PROM is in socket IC20 and the high byte PROM
is in socket IC5.
The settings for switch SW1 are provided on the Installation Report
generated by GCSS from the Application Data. Figure A.3 shows an
example for Installation Reports generated in GCSS 6 and GCSS 7.
GCSS 6 Installation Report Set LK1–LK24 on card as shown

by J01–J24 on report
J25 = CONF1 SW1
J26 = CONF2
ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
OFF
6
ON
7
ON
8
OFF ON
GCSS 7 Installation Report
Figure A.3: Typical GCSS Installation Reports and SW1

Settings—VLM6

A.1.2.2 VLM6 Output Power Card (OPC) Configuration
None

Configuration
Links LK1 to LK24 on the card must be set to the physical address of the
system as shown on the GCSS Installation Report (figure A.3).
Links CONF1 and CONF2 must be set to the intended operation of the
system (hot standby or stand-alone) as defined in the application data for
the WESTRACE. See table A1.
Note: On the GCSS 6 Installation Report, CONF1 and CONF2 correspond

to J25 and J26 respectively.
The setting of links LK25 and LK26 must correspond to the intended VLC
type to be used in the installation:
Link Closed Not Closed
CONF1 Biased to On-line Biased to Off-line
CONF2 Stand-alone Hot Standby
LK251 VLC6 VLC5 and HVLC
LK261 " "
Table A1: CONF1, CONF2, LK25, LK26—Link Settings

1. LK25 and LK26 must be open or closed together.
A.1.3 VLM6 Indications
A.1.3.1 VLM6 Vital Logic Card (VLC6) Indications
A.1.3.1.1 Start Up Indications
Diagnostic LEDs display the module type code, shortly followed by a

firmware version code (reflecting the firmware version installed in the
module). Firmware version is displayed for approximately 8 seconds,
after which all diagnostic LEDs extinguish.
A.1.3.1.2 Operation Indications
A single green Watchdog LED and a single yellow Watchdog LED are
provided to indicate the module is operating correctly and to indicate the
mode of operation:
• In On-line mode, the VLC6 flashes the green LED once per cycle, and
the yellow LED to indicate IMB communications.
• In Standby mode, the VLC6 flashes the yellow LED once per cycle.
A.1.3.1.3 Fault Codes
The VLM6 fault codes written to the Fault Diagnostic Latch have the
following meaning during normal operation. Some fault codes have
different meanings during power-on initialisation and these have been
explicitly declared.
The term ‘Initialisation’ refers to VLM6 Initialisation. Some VLM6 fault

codes are used only in the VLM6 Standby Mode, and some, only in the
VLM6 On-line Mode. These codes have been explicitly declared.
Module Sequence Numbers
In order for the module sequence numbers in the GCSS housing printout
to match the module sequence numbers in the VLM6 fault codes, it is
necessary for the GCSS user to assign sequence number 1 to the NCDM.
Block Fault Codes
CODE(H) FAULT DESCRIPTION ACTION
01 Second Negation Error Indicates fault on other modules
03 PROM Checksum Error Replace VLM6
04 Stack Guard Error "
05 RAM Error "
06 Interrupt Errors "
07 Termination Error "
08 Processor Error "
09 Stack Error "
0A Run Time Error A "
0B Run Time Error B "
0C Run Time Error C "
0D Run Time Error D "
0E Run Time Error E "
0F Run Time Error F "
10 Run Time Error G "
11 Run Time Error H "
12 Run Time Error I "
13 Run Time Error J "
14 Run Time Error K "
15 Run Time Error L "
16 Run Time Error M "
17 Run Time Error N "
Table A2: Fault Codes—Block—VLM6

18 Run Time Error O "
19 Run Time Error P "
1A Run Time Error Q "
1B Run Time Error R "
1C Run Time Error S "
1D Run Time Error T "
1E Run Time Error U "
1F Run Time Error V "
20 Run Time Error W "
21 Run Time Error X "
22 Run Time Error Y "
23 Run Time Error Z Replace VLM6
2D Health Monitoring Time Error Indicates fault on other modules
2E Health Monitoring Health Error "
2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error Replace VLM6
31 Master IMB Startup Timeout "
32 Too Few IMB Calls "
33 Master IMB Interface Error "

Too Many IMB Calls
34 Error code with system shutdown is the Replace VLM6 if shutdown occurred.
result of the invalid number of self test calls Replace diagnostic module if shutdown did
error, ‘STIMBTooFewSTCalls’. not occur.
Error code without system shutdown
indicates IMB timeout of the non-vital
diagnostic module.
IMB Database Error
35 Master IMB Timeout Module 01 Check other modules to identify one that
caused VLM shutdown—ie reported a
failure other than IMB timeout. Replace the
identified module.
36 Master IMB Timeout Module 02 "
3A Master IMB Timeout Module 06 "
3B Master IMB Timeout Module 07 "
3C Master IMB Timeout Module 08 "
3D Master IMB Timeout Module 09 "
3E Master IMB Timeout Module 10 "
Table A2: Fault Codes—Block—VLM6 (Continued)
3F Master IMB Timeout Module 11 "
5A Master IMB Data Error Module DM Replace diagnostic module
5B Master IMB Data Error Module 01 Replace module 01
5C Master IMB Data Error Module 02 Replace module 02
5D Master IMB Data Error Module 03 Replace module 03
5E Master IMB Data Error Module 04 Replace module 04
5F Master IMB Data Error Module 05 Replace module 05
60 Master IMB Data Error Module 06 Replace module 06

6A Master IMB Data Error Module 16 Replace module 16
Specific VLM6 Initialisation Fault Codes

80 CED Checksum Error Replace CED PROM
81 CED GCSS Compatibility Index Error "
82 CED UHVBC Link Error Check installation address and UHVBC

linking
83 CED UHVBC Link Parity Error "
84 CED Data Version Error Check data version switch settings
85 CED Data Error Replace CED PROM
86 IIHCL Data Consistency Error "
87 CED Number Of Logic States Error "
88 CED Module Number Error "
89 CED Slave Kind Error "
8A CED Module Compatibility Index Error Replace CED PROM
8B CED Module Compatibility Index Parity "

Error
8C CED Module Type Error "
8D IHCL Message Sequence Error Replace VLM6
8E IHCL Compatibility Index Error "
8F IHCL Timer Checksum Error "
90 CED Timer Error Replace CED PROM
91 CED Initial Data Error "
92 CED Global Data Error "
93 CED Fixed Data Error "
94 CED Variable Data Error "
95 CED Node Type Error "
96 CED Depth Error "
97 CED Pointer Error "
98 IHCL Installation Address Error Check installation address and VBC

linking.
99 CED Logic Error Replace CED PROM
9A CED Number of Logic States Error "
9B CED Number of Timers Error "
9C Invalid Timer Calculation Error Replace VLM6
9D Invalid Timer Count Error "
9E OPCR State Error "
9F Mnemonic Error "
Table A3: Fault Codes—Specific Initialisation—VLM6


A0 IMB Data Length Error Indicates fault on another module
A1 Invalid Timer Error Replace VLM6
A2 IMB Communication Time Error Indicates fault on another module
A3 SCC Hardware Error Replace VLM6
A4 IMB Module Number Error Indicates fault on another module
A5 IMB Parity Error "
A6 CED Initial State Error Replace CED PROM
A7 Sequence Error Replace VLM6
A8 IMB Port Address Range Error Indicates fault on another module
A9 SCC Hardware Error Replace VLM6
AB Sync Period Expired with no IHCL Message "

Error
AC CED Message Byte Number Error Replace CED PROM
AD CED Message Bit Number Error "
AE IMB Input Message Length Error Indicates fault on another module
AF Invalid System Configuration Data Error Replace VLM6
B0 Consistency Error "
B1 IHCL GCSS Version Number Error Check data version switch settings
B5 Parameter Error Replace VLM6
B6 Output Message Length Error "
B8 Semaphore Error Indicates fault on DPRAM
BD DPRAM Initialisation Error Replace VLM6
C0 Non-vital Message Error Indicates fault on DPRAM
C1 IMB Number I/O Bits Error Indicates fault on another module
C4 IMB Timeout Error "
C5 IMB Scheduler Error "
C6 CED Invalid Data Error Replace CED PROM
C7 CED System Configuration Error "
C8 CED Layout Error "
C9 Timer Difference Error Replace VLM6
CA Timer Expiry Difference Error "
D2 Logic Sequence Error "
D3 Depth Check Error "
D4 Sequence Error "
D5 Sequence Error "
D6 Progress Error "
Table A3: Fault Codes—Specific Initialisation—VLM6 (Continued)

D7 Invalid Data Error "
D9 IHCL Number of Logic States Error Replace CED ROM
DA Too Many Invalid IHCL Messages Received Replace VLM6

Error
DB Last Pointer Error Replace CED ROM
DC OPCR Initialise Error Check supply to OPC. Power off system and
restart after 40 seconds. Replace the OPC or
OPC PFM when the fault persists.
DD NOPCR Error Replace VLM6
DF Initial Maximum Time Error Reduce the number of timers, the logic, or
the I/O capacity of the VLM6. Replace the
VLM6 if the problem persists.
E0 Initial Minimum Time Error Increase the number of timers, the logic, or
the I/O capacity of the VLM6. Replace the
VLM6 if the problem persists.
E1 Initial Sequence Error Replace VLM6
E2 Maximum Time Error "
E3 Minimum Time Error "
E4 Sequence Error "
E6 CED Checksum Error Replace CED PROM
E7 Comp Read Data Error Replace VLM6
E8 Comp Read Pointer Error "
E9 Comp Write Pointer Error "
EF CED DRAM Fixed Data Error Replace CED PROM
F0 Number of Timers Error "
F1 Number of Comp Timers Error "
F2 Cycle Time > 1.3 sec Error Too much logic and too many modules.
Check installation design.
F3 Delay 150 ms Error Replace VLM6
F4 APPDEL Value Error "
F6 Time Stamp Error "
F8 Time Stamp Error "
FA Time Stamp Error "
FC CED DPRAM Variable Data Error Replace CED PROM
FD Time Stamp Error Replace VLM6
FE Mode State Error "
FF PIT Access Error "
A.1.3.2 VLM6 Output Power Card (OPC) Indications
None


Indications
None.
A.1.4 VLM6 External Connections

All external connections to the VLM6 are made via the HOPC PFM which
plugs directly into the UHVBC.
The HOPC PFM External Connector is a 19 way plug and socket Klippon
type BLA/SLA.
Figure A.4 depicts the external connection details of the HOPC PFM.
Figure A.4: External Connections—HOPC PFM—VLM6
The maximum continuous current that passes in each of the connections

is:
24 V supply 4A
OPCR Drive 0.8 A
VSEV 1A
OPCR Back Contact 20 mA

core. The VLM5 is one of the Vital Logic Module types in service.

‘standby’ mode. Each installation has an VLM5 at the processing core
A.2.1 VLM5 Description

The VLM5 comprises two printed circuit boards:
• VLC5 (Vital Logic Card);

plane, and also by a Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (HVBC). Links on
this card (CONF1 and CONF2) determine the service provided by the
particular WESTRACE installation.
A VLM5 occupies slots 2 to 3 in housing 1 of a WESTRACE installation.

The OPC is in Slot 2 and the VLC5 is in Slot 3. Slot 1 in housing 1 must have
a Blanker card inserted.
A.2.1.1 VLM5 Vital Logic Card (VLC5) Description
The VLC5 is the system's central processing module. It controls commu-

outputs.
The VLC5 contains in PROM the Configuration Element Data (CED)

generated by the GCSS. It has configuration data version switches (SW1)
that it uses to ensure the CED in PROM is the correct version.

IC2 IC3
CED Code
High High
Byte Byte
PROM PROM VLE
Backplane
IC19 IC20
Connector
CED Code
Low Low
Byte Byte
PROM PROM
SW1
HVBC
ON
1
ON Connector
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
OFF
6
ON
7
ON
8
OFF ON
Figure A.5: Layout—VLC5—VLM5
A.2.1.2 VLM5 Output Power Card (OPC) Description
A.2.1.3 VLM5 Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (HVBC) Description
Note: A UHVBC can also be used provided LK25 and LK26 are not closed.
See sections A.1.1.3 and A.1.2.3 for details.
The HVBC is a small (half height) printed circuit board installed directly
behind the lower connectors of the VLM5.
It provides:
• a direct connection between the OPC and VLC5 cards, that constitute
the VLM5;
• 24 links (LK1 to LK24, see figure A.6) that determine the unique
physical address of the WESTRACE installation. The setting of these
links is checked against the data contained in the Application Data
PROMS, thereby preventing installation and execution of an
incorrect version of application data;
• 2 links (CONF1 and CONF2, see figures A.6 and A.7, and table A4) that
determine the operation of the VLM5. The setting of these links
determines whether the VLM5 is operating in Stand-alone or Hot
Standby mode. If it is in Hot Standby Mode they are also determine

whether it is the default On Line or Standby system.
Figure A.6: HVBC—Rear Side View—VLM5
GCSS Installation Report. See figure A.7.
A.2.2 VLM5 Configuration
A.2.2.1 VLM5 Vital Logic Card (VLC5) Configuration
The CED is contained in two PROMs, a high byte and a low byte (see
figure A.5). The low byte PROM is in socket IC19 and the high byte PROM
is in socket IC2.
example for installation reports generated in GCSS 6 and GCSS 7.


J25 = CONF1 SW1
J26 = CONF2
ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
OFF
6
ON
7
ON
8
OFF ON

Settings—VLM5
None
A.2.2.3 VLM5 Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (HVBC) Configuration
Links LK1 to LK24 on the card must be set to the physical address of the
system as shown on the GCSS Installation Report (figure A.7).

Table A4: CONF1, CONF2—Link Settings
A.2.3 VLM5 Indications
A.2.3.1 VLM5 Vital Logic Card (VLC5) Indications

A single green Watchdog LED and a single Yellow Watchdog LED are
provided to indicate the module is operating correctly and to indicate the
mode of operation.
In On-line mode, the VLC5 flashes the green LED once per cycle and the
yellow LED around the IMB communications.
In Standby mode, the VLC5 flashes the yellow LED once per cycle.
The VLM5 fault codes written to the Fault Diagnostic Latch have the

The term ‘Initialisation’ refers to VLM5 Initialisation. Some VLM5 fault

codes are used only in the VLM5 Standby Mode, and some, only in the
VLM5 On-line Mode. These codes have been explicitly declared.
to match the module sequence numbers in the VLM5 fault codes, it is
necessary for the GCSS user to assign the highest sequence number to
the NVC/DM.
Block Fault Codes
05 RAM Error "
09 Stack Error "
Table A5: Fault Codes—Block—VLM5
23 Run Time Error Z Replace VLM5
2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error Replace VLM5

Too Many IMB Calls
34 Error code with system shutdown is the Replace VLM5 if shutdown occurred.
result of the invalid number of self test calls Replace diagnostic module if shutdown did
error, ‘STIMBTooFewSTCalls’. not occur.
Error code without system shutdown
diagnostic module.
IMB Database Error
identified module.


Specific VLM5 Initialisation Fault Codes
82 CED VBC Link Error Check installation address and VBC linking
83 CED VBC Link Parity Error "
86 CED Data Error "
87 CED Number Of Logic States Error "
8A CED Module Compatibility Index Error Replace CED PROM

Error
8D CED Module Compatibility Index Error "
8E CED Module Compatibility Index Parity "

Error
8F CED Module Type Error "
90 CED Timer Error "
99 CED Logic Error "
9A CED Global Data Error "
9B CED Fixed Data Error "
9C CED Variable Data Error "
9D CED Logic Error "
9E CED Slave Kind Error "
Table A6: Fault Codes—Specific Initialisation—VLM5
A1 IMB Slave Kind Error "
A2 IMB Communication Time Error "

IMB Communication Type Error
A4 IMB Module Number Error "
B8 IMB Module Number Error "
B9 IMB Module Type Error "
BA IMB Data Error "
BB IMB Module Number Error "
BC IMB Module Type Error "
BD IMB Message Byte Number Error "
BE IMB Message Bit Number Error "
BF IMB Output Message Length Error Indicates fault on another module
C0 IMB Last Pointer Error "
C1 IMB Number I/O Bits Error "
C2 IMB Module Number Error "
C3 IMB Slave Kind Error "
C6 Invalid Result Replace VLM5
C7 CED System Configuration Error Replace CED PROM
C8 CED Layout Error "
CF CED System Configuration Error "
D0 Invalid Result "
D6 Progress Error Replace VLM5
D9 Module Number Error Replace CED PROM
DA Module Number Error "
DB Last Pointer Error "
DF Initial Maximum Time Error Replace VLM5
E0 Initial Minimum Time Error "
E1 Initial Sequence Error "
E6 CED Layout Error "

EA Comp Number Logic States Data Error "
EB CED Compatibility Index Error Replace CED PROM
EC CED VBC Link Error Check installation address and VBC linking
ED CED Parity Error Replace CED PROM
EE CED Version Error Check data version settings
EF Module Number Error Replace CED PROM
F0 Number of Timers Error Replace VLM5
F3 Delay 150 ms Error "
F5 CED Slave Kind Error Replace CED PROM
F8 CED Module Type Error Replace CED PROM
F9 CED Module Number Error "
FA CED Module Type Error "
FB CED Last Module Pointer Error "
FC CED Output Message Length Error "
FD Invalid System Configuration Data Error Replace VLM5
Specific VLM5 Standby Mode Fault Codes
80 IHCL CED Checksum Error Replace CED PROM
81 IHCL Installation Address Error Check installation address and VBC linking
82 IHCL GCSS Version Number Error Check data version switch settings
86 IHCL Data Consistency Error Replace CED PROM
87 IHCL Data Consistency Error "
88 CED Number of Logic States Error "
89 CED Initial State Error "
8A CED Initial State Error "
Table A7: Fault Codes—Specific Standby Mode—VLM5
8B Sync Period Expired With No IHCL Replace VLM5

Message Error
8C Too Many Invalid IHCL Messages Received "

Error
8D Invalid IHCL Message Error "
8E Compatibility Index Error "
8F Timer Checksum Error "
90 Invalid IHCL Message Error "
91 Compatibility Index Error "
92 Timer Checksum Error "
93 CED Number of Logic States Error Replace CED PROM
94 SCC Hardware Error Replace VLM5
95 SCC Hardware Error Replace VLM5
96 SCC Hardware Error "
98 Invalid Data Error "
9F OPCR State Error "

A7 IMB Module Type Error "
A8 IMB Port Address Range Error "
AA IMB Module Number Error "
AB IMB Module Type Error "
AC IMB Message Byte Number Error "
AD IMB Message Bit Number Error "
AE IMB Input Message Length Error "
AF IMB Last Pointer Error "
Table A7: Fault Codes—Specific Standby Mode—VLM5 (Continued)

D2 Logic Sequence Error Replace VLM5
E4 Sequence Error "
E7 Logic Sequence Error Replace VLM5
E8 Logic Sequence Error "
F0 Number of Timers Error "
F1 Number of Comp Timers Error Replace VLM5
Check installation design
FE Mode State Error Replace VLM5
Table A7: Fault Codes—Specific Standby Mode—VLM5 (Continued)
Specific VLM5 On-Line Mode Fault Codes
9A CED Number of Logic States Error Replace CED PROM
9C Invalid Timer Calculation Error Replace VLM5
Table A8: Fault Codes—Specific On-line—VLM5

IMB Communications Type Error
AC IMB Message Byte Number Error Indicates fault on another module
B4 IMB Message Byte Number Error "
B5 IMB Message Bit Number Error "
B6 IMB Output Message Length Error "
B7 IMB Last Pointer Error "
BA IMB Data Error "
BF IMB Output Message Length Error "
Table A8: Fault Codes—Specific On-line—VLM5 (Continued)

C6 Invalid Timer Calculation Error Replace VLM5
C7 Invalid Timer Count Error "
C8 Invalid Timer Error "
C9 Timer Difference Error "
CB Invalid Timer Error "
CC Timer Difference Error "
CD Timer Expiry Difference Error "
CE Timer Data Error Replace VLM5
D6 Progress Error "
restart after 40 seconds. Replace OPC or
OPC PFM when fault persists.
DE NOPCR Error "
E4 Sequence Error "
EF CED Module Number Error Replace CED PROM
F0 Number Of Timers Error "
F1 Number Of Comp Timers Error "
Check installation design
None
A.2.3.3 VLM5 Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (HVBC) Configuration
None.
A.2.4 VLM5 External Connections

All external connections to the VLM5 are made via the HOPC PFM which
plugs directly into the HVBC.
type BLA/SLA.

Figure A.8: External Connections—HOPC PFM—VLM5

is:
24 V supply 4A
OPCR Drive 0.8 A
VSEV 1A
Hot Standby Vital Logic Module (HVLM128)
A.3 Hot Standby Vital Logic Module (HVLM128)

core. The HVLM128 is one the Vital Logic Module types in service. This
section covers the HVLM128 variant of the module although there are
other variants.

‘standby’ mode. Each installation has an HVLM at the processing core
A.3.1 Description
The HVLM comprises two (2) printed circuit boards:
• HVLC (Hot Standby Vital Logic Card);

plane, and also by a Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (HVBC). Links on
this card (CONF1 and CONF2) determine the service provided by the
particular WESTRACE installation.
An HVLM occupies slots 2 to 3 in housing 1 of a WESTRACE installation.

The OPC is in Slot 2 and the HVLC is in Slot 3. Slot 1 in housing 1 must
have a Blanker card inserted.
A.3.1.1 Hot Standby Vital Logic Card (HVLC)
The HVLC is the system's central processing module. It controls commu-

outputs.
The HVLC contains in PROMs the Configuration Element Data (CED)

generated by the GCSS. The card has data version configuration
switches (SW1) that it uses to confirm the CED in PROM is the correct
version.

VLE
Backplane
Connector
CED CED
Low High
IC26
IC27
Byte Byte
PROM PROM
SW1 HVBC
ON Connector
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
OFF
6
7 ON
ON
8
OFF ON
Figure A.9: Layout—HVLC—HVLM
A.3.1.2 Output Power Card (OPC)
A.3.1.3 Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card (HVBC)
Note: A UHVBC can also be used provided LK25 and LK26 are not closed.
See sections A.1.1.3 and A.1.2.3 for details.
The HVBC is a small, half height, printed circuit board installed directly
behind the lower connectors of the HVLM.
It provides:
• a direct connection between the OPC and HVLC cards, that constitute
the HVLM;
• 24 links (LK1 to LK24) that determine the unique physical address of
the WESTRACE installation. The setting of these links is checked
against the data contained in the Application Data PROMS, thereby
preventing installation and execution of an incorrect version of
application data;
• 2 links (CONF1 andCONF2, see figures A.10 and A.11, and table A9)
that determine the operation of the HVLM. The setting of these links
determines whether the HVLM is operating in Stand-alone or Hot
Standby mode. If it is in Hot Standby Mode they are also determine

whether it is the default On Line or Standby system.
Figure A.10: Rear Side View—HVBC—HVLM
GCSS Installation Report ( figure A.11).
A.3.2 Configuration
The CED is contained in two PROMs, high byte and low byte (see figure
A.9). The low byte PROM is in socket IC26 and the high byte PROM is in
socket IC27.
example for Installation Reports generated in GCSS 6 and GCSS 7.


J25 = CONF1 SW1
J26 = CONF2
CONF2 ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
OFF
6
ON
7
ON
8
OFF ON

Settings—HVLM128
None
The links LK1 to LK24 must be set to the physical address of the system
shown by J01 to J24 on the GCSS Installation Report. See figure A.11.

Table A9: CONF1, CONF2—Link Settings
A.3.3 Indications

The module commences flashing the green watchdog LED to indicate the
module is operational and working correctly.
The module flashes the yellow On-Line LED to indicate when it starts
executing application logic.
The HVLM fault codes written to the Fault Diagnostic Latch have the
The term ‘Initialisation’ refers to HVLM Initialisation. Some HVLM

fault codes are used only in the HLVM Standby Mode, and some, only in
the HVLM On-line Mode. These codes have been explicitly declared.

to match the module sequence numbers in the HVLM fault codes it is
necessary for the GCSS user to assign the highest sequence number to
the NVC/DM.
Block Fault Codes
03 PROM Checksum Error Replace HVLM
05 RAM Error Replace HVLM
09 Stack Error "
Table A10: Fault Codes—Block—HVLM
23 Run Time Error Z "
2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error Replace HVLM
31 Master IMB Startup Timeout Replace HVLM

Too Many IMB Calls
2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error Replace HVLM

Too Many IMB Calls
34 Error code with system shutdown is the Replace HVLM if shutdown occurred.
result of the invalid number of selftest calls
error, ‘STIMBTooFewSTCalls’. Replace diagnostic module if shutdown did
Error code without system shutdown not occur.
diagnostic module.
IMB Database Error
identified module.
Table A10: Fault Codes—Block—HVLM (Continued)


Specific HVLM Initialisation Fault Codes
83 CED VBC Link Parity Error Check installation address and VBC linking
86 CED Data Error "
87 CED Number Of Logic States Error Replace CED PROM
8A CED Module Compatibility Index Error "

Error

Error
9E CED Slave Kind Error "
Table A11: Fault Codes—Specific Initialisation—HVLM

B8 IMB Module Number Error Indicates fault on another module
BA IMB Data Error "
BC IMB Module Type Error Indicates fault on another module
C6 CED Invalid Data Error Replace CED PROM
C7 CED System Configuration Error "
CF CED System Configuration Error "
D0 Invalid Result "
D6 Progress Error Replace HVLM
D9 Module Number Error
DA Module Number Error
DB Last Pointer Error
DF Initial Maximum Time Error Replace HVLM
E1 Initial Sequence Error "
E7 Comp Read Data Error Replace HVLM
Table A11: Fault Codes—Specific Initialisation—HVLM (Continued)

EB CED Compatibility Index Error Replace CED PROM
EC CED VBC Link Error Check installation address and VBC linking
ED CED Parity Error Replace CED PROM
EE CED Version Error Check data version settings
EF Module Number Error
F0 Number of Timers Error Replace HVLM
F3 Delay 150 ms Error "
F5 CED Slave Kind Error Replace CED PROM

Initial Progress Error Replace HVLM
FD Invalid System Configuration Data Error Replace HVLM
Table A11: Fault Codes—Specific Initialisation—HVLM (Continued)
Specific HVLM Standby Mode Fault Codes
86 IHCL Data Consistency Error Replace CED PROM
87 IHCL Data Consistency Error "
88 CED Number of Logic States Error "
89 CED Initial State Error "
8A CED Initial State Error "
8B Sync Period Expired With No IHCL Replace HVLM

Message Error
Table A12: Fault Code—Specific Standby Mode—HVLM
8C Too Many Invalid IHCL Messages Received "

Error
8D Invalid IHCL Message Error "
8E Compatibility Index Error "
8F Timer Checksum Error "
90 Invalid IHCL Message Error Replace HVLM
91 Compatibility Index Error "
92 Timer Checksum Error "
93 CED Number of Logic States Error Replace CED PROM
94 SCC Hardware Error Replace HVLM

D2 Logic Sequence Error Replace HVLM
Table A12: Fault Code—Specific Standby Mode—HVLM (Continued)

E4 Sequence Error Replace HVLM
E7 Logic Sequence Error Replace HVLM
E8 Logic Sequence Error "
F0 Number of Timers Error Replace HVLM
F2 Cycle Time > 1 sec Error Too much logic and too many modules—
check installation design
F3 Delay 150 ms Error Replace HVLM
FE Mode State Error Replace HVLM
Table A12: Fault Code—Specific Standby Mode—HVLM (Continued)
Specific HVLM On-Line Mode Fault Codes
9A CED Number of Logic States Error Replace CED PROM
9C Invalid Timer Calculation Error Replace HVLM
Table A13: Fault Codes—Specific On-line Mode—HVLM

IMB Communications Type Error
A7 IMB Module Type Error Indicates fault on another module
AB IMB Module Type Error Indicates fault on another module
B5 IMB Message Bit Number Error "
B6 IMB Input Message Length Error "
BA IMB Data Error "
Table A13: Fault Codes—Specific On-line Mode—HVLM (Continued)

C6 Invalid Timer Calculation Error Replace HVLM
C7 Invalid Timer Count Error "
C8 Invalid Timer Error "
C9 Timer Difference Error Replace HVLM
CD Timer Expiry Difference Error Replace HVLM
CE Timer Data Error "
D6 CED Invalid Data Error Replace CED PROM

Progress Error Replace HVLM
D8 Invalid Data Error Replace HVLM
restart after 40 seconds. If fault persists
replace OPC or OPC PFM
DD NOPCR Error Replace HVLM
DF NOPCR Error "
E4 Sequence Error "
E7 Comp Read Data Error Replace HVLM
EF CED Module Number Error Replace CED PROM
check installation design
F3 Delay 150 ms Error Replace HVLM
F6 APPDEL Progress Error "
F7 Normal Progress Error "
FE Mode State Error Replace HVLM
None
None.

A.3.4 External Connections

All external connections to the HVLM are made via the HOPC PFM
which plugs directly into the HVBC.
type BLA/SLA.
Figure A.12: External Connections—HOPC PFM—HVLM

is:
24 V supply 4A
OPCR Drive 0.8 A
VSEV 1A

core. The VLM1 is one the Vital Logic Module types in service.
A.4.1 Description
The VLM1 comprises three (3) printed circuit boards:
• VLC (Vital Logic Card);
• CEC (Configuration Element Card);
These boards are interconnected by means of the VLE backplane, and

also by a Vital Backplane Card (VBC).
A VLM1 occupies slots 1 to 3 in housing 1 of a WESTRACE system. The

OPC is in Slot 1, the CEC is in Slot 2 and the VLC is in Slot 3.
A.4.1.1 Vital Logic Card (VLC)
The VLC is the system's central processing module. It controls communi-

cations between the system modules and performs all Application Logic
processing to determine the current state of all vital and non-vital
outputs.
A.4.1.2 Configuration Element Card (CEC)
The CEC contains in PROMs the Application Data generated by the CS.
It has configuration version switches (SW1) which the VLC uses to
ensure Configuration Application Data in PROM is the correct version.
VLE
Backplane
Connector
CED CED
High Low
U1
U2
Byte Byte
PROM PROM
SW1
ON VBC
1
Connector
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
OFF
6
ON
7
ON
8
OFF ON
Figure A.13: Layout—CEC—VLM1

A.4.1.4 Vital Backplane Card (VBC)
The VBC is a small, half height printed circuit board installed directly
behind the lower connectors of the VLM1.
The VBC provides:

• a direct connection between the OPC, CEC and VLC cards, which
constitute the VLM1;
• 24 links (LK1 to LK24) which determine the unique physical address
of the WESTRACE installation. The setting of these links is checked
against the data contained in the Application Data PROMS, thereby
preventing installation and execution of the wrong Application Data.
Figure A.14: General Arrangement from Rear—VBC—VLM1
A.4.2 Configuration
None
The CED is contained in two PROMs, high byte and low byte (see figure
A.13). The high byte PROM is in socket U1 HIGH. The low byte PROM is
in socket U2 LOW.
The settings for switch SW1 (figure A.15) are provided on the Installation
Assembly Details Printout generated by the CS from the Application
Data.
SW1
ON
1
ON
2
ON
3
ON
4
ON
5
OFF
6
ON
7
ON
8
OFF ON
Figure A.15: Example SW1 Settings—CEC—VLM1
None
Details of the setting of the links LK1 to LK24 (see figure A.14) must corre-
spond to the physical address of the system in the Application Data print-
out.
A.4.3 Indications

The module commences flashing the green watchdog LED to indicate the
module is operational and working correctly.
00 No Fault Not a fault
Table A14: Fault Codes—VLM1

05 RAM Error "
06 Interrupt Error "
09 Stack Error "
22 Run Time Error Y Replace VLM1
Table A14: Fault Codes—VLM1 (Continued)
2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error "
34 Master IMB Timeout Module DM Replace the DM module
identified module.

5A Master IMB Data Error Module DM Replace DM module
5B Master IMB Data Error Module 01 Replace Module 01
5C Master IMB Data Error Module 02 Replace Module 02
5D Master IMB Data Error Module 03 Replace Module 03
5E Master IMB Data Error Module 04 Replace Module 04
5F Master IMB Data Error Module 05 Replace Module 05
60 Master IMB Data Error Module 06 Replace Module 06
6A Master IMB Data Error Module 16 Replace Module 16
7A Master IMB Data Error Module 32 Replace Module 32
81 CED CSS Compatibility Index Error "
83 CED Parity Error "
86 CED Data Error "
87 CED No Logic States Error "
8A CED Module Compatibility Index Error "

Error

Error
93 CED Fixed Data Error Replace CED PROM

9E CED Backplane Address Error "
9F CED Mnemonic Error "
A0 IMB Data Length Error Indicates fault on other modules.
B5 IMB Message Bit Number Error Indicates fault on other modules.
B6 IMB Input Message Length Error "
BA IMB Data Error "
C8 Invalid Timer Error Replace VLM1
C9 Timer Difference Error "
CD Timer Expiry Difference Error "
CE Timer Data Error "
restart after 40 seconds. If fault persists
replace OPC or OPC PFM
DE NOPCR Error "
DF Initial Maximum Time Error "
E1 Initial Sequence Error Replace VLM1

E4 Sequence Error "
E9 Comp Write Data Error "
EA Comp No. Logic States Data Error "
check installation design.
None
None
None.

All external connections to the VLM1 are made via the OPC PFM which
has tails with plugs attached to plug into connectors 4 and 5 on the VBC.
The OPC PFM External Connector is a 15 way plug and socket Klippon
type BLA/SLA.
Figure A.16 depicts the external connection details of the OPC PFM.
Figure A.16: External Connections—OPC PFM—VLM1
The maximum continuous current that passes in each of the connections is:
24 V supply 4A
OPCR Drive 0.8 A
VSEV 1A

Vital Lamp Output Modules (VLOM)
A.5 Vital Lamp Output Modules (VLOM)
A.5.1 Description
The VLOM is the interface between WESTRACE and signalling lamps.
VLOM outputs directly drive signal lamps and other nominated equip-
ment. The output may be steady, flashing or off.
The VLOM modules with 12 lamp outputs comprise three printed circuit
boards:
• VPIO Digital Board (VPIODB);
• two VLOM Analogue Boards (VLOMAB).
A.5.2 Particulars
The VLOM is available with an ac lamp output voltage of 110V. VLOM
modules have a flashing output (signified with ‘F’) and they are available
with twelve lamp outputs (signified with ‘T’); VLOMFT110.
A.5.3 Characteristics of VLOM 110
Nominal Signalling Voltage (Vsig Input) 110 Vac

External Fuse Protection 3.0 A
Vsig Input (min.) 100 Vac
Vsig Input (max) 130 Vac
Lamp proving current levels < 100 mA, lamp off
> 160 mA, lamp on
A maximum of 26 VLOM modules may be installed in any one system.

Refer to the WESTRACE Application Manual for further details.
A.5.4 Function
The VLOM requires an external signalling supply that is switched to
source six (or twelve) voltages to drive up to six (or twelve) signalling
lamps simultaneously.
The VPIODB is processor based and is responsible for interfacing with

both the VLM and the VLOMAB(s). It performs the module's self-tests,
housekeeping, monitoring of the analogue card's integrity and Health
Monitoring functions.
Lamp Outputs are not isolated from the signalling supply, and use a
common return. The VLOM provides Vital Hot filament proving and
non-vital cold filament detection.
The VLOM will attempt to isolate an incorrectly energised output by

attempting to blow an on-board fuse. If this action is unsuccessful, the
VLOM will initiate second negation (shutdown) without delay.
The fuse blowing process is known as graceful degradation.
A.5.5 Configuration
None
A.5.6 Indications
A.5.6.1 Start Up
Diagnostic LEDs display module type code, shortly followed by a

after which all diagnostic LEDs will extinguish.
A.5.6.2 Operation
The module will commence flashing the green watchdog LED to indicate
the module is operational and working correctly.
A.5.6.3 Fault Codes
00 No Fault Not a fault.
01 Second Negation Error Indicates a fault on other modules.
02 Module Type Error Replace VLOM
03 EPROM Checksum Error "
05 RAM Error "
09 Stack Error "
13 Run Time Error J Replace VLOM
Table A15: Fault Codes—VLOM

24 IMB Timeout Error "
25 IMB Address Error "
26 IMB Address Parity Error "
27 IMB CI Transfer Error "
28 IMB Transfer Type Error "
29 IMB Message Length Error "
2A IMB True Byte Error "
2B IMB Check Message Error "
2C IMB Inconsistency Error "
2D Health Monitoring Time Error Indicates a fault on other modules
2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error Replace VLOM
30 Module Type and Fault Code Error "
31 ST IMB Start Up Timeout "
32 ST IMB Too Few IMB Calls "
33 ST IMB Too Many IMB Calls "
34 ST IMB Too Few ST Calls "
80 Negation Fail Error Replace VLOM
Table A15: Fault Codes—VLOM (Continued)
81 Initialise Program Check Error "
82 Progress Check Error "
83 Cycle Time Error "
84 CPU Speed Error "
85 Variable Corruption Error "
8C Gain Check Offset Base Error "
8D Gain Check Offset Ch 1 Error "
8E Gain Check Offset Ch 2 Error "
8F Gain Check Offset Ch 3 Error "
90 Gain Check Offset Ch 4 Error "
99 Gain Check Detect Base Error "
9A Gain Check Detect Ch 1 Error "
9B Gain Check Detect Ch 2 Error "
9C Gain Check Detect Ch 3 Error "
9D Gain Check Detect Ch 4 Error "
9E Gain Check Detect Ch 5 Error "
9F Gain Check Detect Ch 6 Error "
A0 Gain Check Detect Ch 7 Error "
AA ADC Target Error "
AB ADC Reference Error "
BD Diverse Gain Filter Hi Base Error Replace VLOM

BE Diverse Gain Filter Hi Ch 1 Error "
BF Diverse Gain Filter Hi Ch 2 Error "
C0 Diverse Gain Filter Hi Ch 3 Error "
C1H Diverse Gain Filter Hi Ch 4 Error "
D7 Ground Test Filter Det Base Error "
D8 Ground Test Filter Det Brd 1 Error Check PFM mating with this module, else
Replace VLOM or PFM
D9 Ground Test Filter Det Brd 2 Error Check PFM mating with this module, else
Replace VLOM or PFM
DA Ground Test Filter Line Base Error Replace VLOM
DB Ground Test Filter Line Brd 1 Error Check PFM mating with this module, else
Replace VLOM or PFM
DC Ground Test Filter Line Brd 2 Error Check PFM mating with this module, else
Replace VLOM or PFM
EA True Decode Parity Error Replace VLOM
EB Comp Decode Parity Error "
F0 Gain Check Invalid Data "
FA Ground Test Invalid Data "
FC Cold Proving Filter Error "
FD Cold Proving Lamp Error "

External connections to the VLOM are made via the VLOM PFM.
The VLOM PFM External Connector is a 19 way plug and socket Klippon
type BLA/SLA.
Figure A.17 depicts the external connection details of the VLOM PFM.
Figure A.17: External Connections—VLOM PFM—VLOM
The Return Sense must be connected to the Supply Return Bus Bar. We
recommend that the return sense and supply return be run as a twisted
pair.

Vital Relay Output Modules (VROM)
A.6 Vital Relay Output Modules (VROM)
A.6.1 Description
The VROM directly drives the coils of signalling relays. It is comprised
of two printed circuit boards:
• VPIO Digital Board (VPIODB);
• VROM Analogue Board (VROMAB).
A.6.2 Particulars
The VROM is available with a relay output voltage of 50 Vdc.
A.6.3 Characteristics of VROM 50
Nominal Signalling Supply Voltage1 50 Vdc
Signalling Supply Input (minimum, trough Voltage) 42 Vdc
Signalling Supply Input (maximum, peak Voltage) 60 Vdc
External Fuse Protection 2.5 A
Output Load 3 W nominal per output

18 W max. continuous
output per module
1. Signalling Supply Voltage Ripple must be semi smooth and within the input
load minimum and maximum shown .
A.6.4 Function
The VROM requires an external signalling supply from which it gener-
ates eight isolated voltage sources to drive up to eight signalling relays
simultaneously.
The VPIODB is processor based and it interfaces with the VLM and the
VROMAB. It performs self-testing, housekeeping, monitoring of the
analogue card's integrity and Health Monitoring functions for the
module.
Whenever the VROM detects an incorrectly energised output (according

to the internal state), the module will attempt to isolate the particular
output by blowing an in-line fuse. If this action is unsuccessful, the
VROM will initiate system negation (shutdown) without delay.
The process of fuse blowing is known as graceful degradation.
A.6.5 Configuration
None
A.6.6 Indications
A.6.6.1 Start Up

module). The firmware version is displayed for approximately eight
seconds, after which all diagnostic LEDs will extinguish.
A.6.6.2 Operation
A.6.6.3 Fault Codes
01 Second Negation Error Indicates fault on other modules.
02 Module Type Error Replace VROM
05 RAM Error "
09 Stack Error "
Table A16: Fault Codes—VROM

17 Run Time Error N Replace VROM
2D Health Monitoring Time Error Indicates a fault on other modules
2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error Replace VROM
8C True IMB Parity Error "
8D Comp IMB Parity Error "
8E True Channel Status Base Error "
8F True Channel Status Ch 1 Error "
90 True Channel Status Ch 2 Error "
Table A16: Fault Codes—VROM (Continued)
94 True Channel Status Ch 6 Error Replace VROM
97 Comp Channel Status Base Error "
98 Comp Channel Status Ch 1 Error "
99 Comp Channel Status Ch 2 Error "
9A Comp Channel Status Ch 3 Error "
9B Comp Channel Status Ch 4 Error "
9C Comp Channel Status Ch 5 Error "
9D Comp Channel Status Ch 6 Error "
9E Comp Channel Status Ch 7 Error "
9F Comp Channel Status Ch 8 Error "
A0 ADC Voltage Reference Error "
A1 ADC Target Failure "
A2 True Relay Test Base Error "
A3 True Relay Test Ch 1 Error "
AA True Relay Test Ch 8 Error "
AB Comp Relay Test Base Error "
AC Comp Relay Test Ch 1 Error "
AD Comp Relay Test Ch 2 Error "
AE Comp Relay Test Ch 3 Error "
AF Comp Relay Test Ch 4 Error "
B0 Comp Relay Test Ch 5 Error "
B4 U Woggle Test Base Error "
B5 U Woggle Test Ch 1 Error "

B6 U Woggle Test Ch 2 Error Replace VROM
BA U Woggle Test Ch 6 Error "
BB U Woggle Test Ch 7 Error "
BC U Woggle Test Ch 8 Error "
BD V Woggle Test Bad Result Error "
BE V Woggle Test Base Error "
BF V Woggle Test Ch 1 Error "
C0 V Woggle Test Ch 2 Error "
C7 Invalid Comp Sample "
C8 Invalid Comp Relay State "
C9 Cycle Time Error "
CA Invalid Comp Relay State "
CB Invalid Comp Relay State "
CC Invalid Comp Relay State "
CD CPU Speed Error "
CE Variable Corruption Error "
CF Init Program Check Error "
D0 Life Program Check Error "

The VROM PFM External Connector is a 19 way plug and socket Klippon
type BLA/SLA.
Figure A.18 depicts the external connection details of the VROM PFM.
19 way plug and Printed Circuit Board

socket
1 Supply + Feed
2 Supply - Return
3 Not used
4 Relay 1 +
5 Relay 1 -
6 Relay 2 +
7 Relay 2 -
8 Relay 3 +
9 Relay 3 -
10 Relay 4 +
11 Relay 4 - IFeed
Relay 5 + IRtn
12
13 Relay 5 -
14 Relay 6 +
15 Relay 6 -
16 Relay 7 +
17 Relay 7 -
18 Relay 8 +
19 Relay 8 -
Figure A.18: External Connections—VROM PFM—VROM

Vital Parallel Input Modules (VPIM)
A.7 Vital Parallel Input Modules (VPIM)
A.7.1 Description
The VPIM is the interface between WESTRACE and signalling inputs
such as point detection and track circuits. VPIM inputs connect directly
to external signalling equipment.
The VPIM module is comprised of two printed circuit boards:

• VPIO Digital Board (VPIODB), and;
• VPIM Analogue Board (VPIMAB).
A.7.2 Particulars
The VPIM is available with an input voltage of 50 Vdc.
A.7.3 Characteristics of VPIM 50
Nominal Voltage 50 Vdc
De-energised Input Voltage range −100 V to +10.5 V
Energised Input Voltage range 30 V to 100 V
A.7.4 Function
The VPIODB is processor based and it interfaces with the VLM and the
VPIMAB. It performs self-testing, housekeeping, monitoring of the
analogue card's integrity and Health Monitoring functions for the
module.
All VPIM inputs have a non-vital filter to permit operation with inputs
with high levels of ac. The VPIM samples the input channels, and rejects
any input that is changing at a rate between 45Hz and 11kHz. All inputs
to the VPIM are filtered to reject fleeting inputs.
Each VPIM input is individually fused to protect the module from over
voltage.
A.7.5 Configuration
None.
A.7.6 Indications
A.7.6.1 Start Up

module). The firmware version is displayed for approximately 8 seconds,

A.7.6.2 Operation
A.7.6.3 Fault Codes
01 Second Negation Error Indicates fault in another module
02 Module Type Error Replace VPIM
05 RAM Error "
09 Stack Error "
11 Run Time Error H: "
Table A17: Fault Codes—VPIM

1B Run Time Error R Replace VPIM
2D Health Monitoring Time Error Indicates fault in another module
2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error Replace VPIM
B4 Progress Check Error "
BE Sampler Spacing Test Error "
C8 Self Test Error "
D2 ADC Test Pattern Error "
DC ADC Voltage Reference Error "
Table A17: Fault Codes—VPIM (Continued)

External connections to the VPIM are made via the VPIM PFM.
The VPIM PFM External Connector is a double stacked 24 way plug and
socket Klippon type BLA/SLA.
Figure A.19 depicts the external connection details of the VPIM PFM.
Figure A.19: External Connections—VPIM PFM—VPIM

Vital Telemetry Continuous Module (VTC)
A.8 Vital Telemetry Continuous Module (VTC)

A.8.1 Description
The VTC module enables vital data communication between two
WESTRACE installations by providing continuous data transfer.
A.8.2 Particulars
The VTC is comprised of a single printed circuit board.
It communicates using RS232-C and is configured as a DTE.
The address of the module is defined in the Application Data for the
system, held in PROMs on the VLM or CEC where it is used.
A.8.3 Function
The VTC continuously transmits data over a dedicated serial channel to
another VTC.
Two forms of the data are transmitted; the True and Complement repre-
sentations of the data. These messages are formed into code words, and
the two code words are transmitted separately over the serial channel.
If in any two second period either VTC fails to receive a correct ‘pair of
code words’ from the serial channel, it will indicate a ‘Loss of Input Chan-
nel’ (LOIC) status to the VLM by setting LOIC to logic state 0. This status
will remain until the VTC receives a correct pair of code words.
When LOIC is set to logic state 0, the VLM ensures that all inputs derived
from the VTC message are set to logic state 0 to ensure safety. All data
received from the VTC during this period is ignored, and will remain so
until the LOIC status is set to logic state 1 by the receipt of valid code
words.
The VTC derives power for its communication circuits from an external
24 Vdc supply, generated by the OPC (as part of the VLM). This supply is
known as the Vital Serial Enable Voltage (VSEV). Removal of this volt-
age positively prevents the VTC from transmitting and receiving data.
This is done when the VLM cannot assure the integrity of the data and
hence the safety of the system under failure conditions. Removal of the
VSEV occurs simultaneously with de-energising of the OPCR.
The VTC is processor based and it interfaces with the VLM. It performs
self-testing, housekeeping and Health Monitoring functions for the
module.
Note: Do not connect the signal ground line to earth, as this may result in
an unsafe condition though the introduction of earth loops and
induced earth potentials.
A.8.4 Configuration
None.
A.8.5 Indications
A.8.5.1 Start Up

A.8.5.2 Operation
A.8.5.3 Fault Codes
02 Module Type Error Replace VTC
05 RAM Error "
09 Stack Error "
Table A18: Fault Codes—VTC

14 Run Time Error K Replace VTC
2D Health Monitoring Time Error Indicates a fault in another module
2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error Replace VTC
80 True IMB Parity Error "
Table A18: Fault Codes—VTC (Continued)
81 Comp IMB Parity Error Replace VTC
97 Hardware Timer Error "
98 Corrupt Data or Operating Error "
99 Corrupt Data Input "
9A Primary Loc Error "
9B Corrupt Data or Transmit Error "
9C Insufficient Time Lapse "
9D True Output Parity Check Error "
9E Comp Output Parity Check Error "
Table A18: Fault Codes—VTC (Continued)

External Connections to the VTC are made via the SIO232 PFM.
The SIO232 PFM External Connectors are a DB25 plug and socket for
RS232 interface, and a 2 way plug and socket Klippon type BLA/SLA for
power.
Figure A.20 depicts the external connection details of the SIO232 PFM.
Figure A.20: External Connections—SIO232 PFM—VTC
Pin Function
1 Chassis Ground
2 Transmit Data (TxD)
3 Receive Data (RxD)
4 Request to Send (RTS)
Table A19: DB25 Pinout—SIO232 PFM—VTC

Pin Function
5 Clear to Send (CTS)
7 Signal Ground (GND)
8 Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
17 Receive Clock (RXC)
20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
24 Transmit Clock (TXC)
Table A19: DB25 Pinout—SIO232 PFM—VTC (Continued)
This module communicates using RS232-C and is configured as a DTE.
Enhanced Vital Telemetry Continuous Module (EVTC)
A.9 Enhanced Vital Telemetry Continuous

Module (EVTC)
A.9.1 Description
The EVTC enables vital data communication between two WESTRACE
installations by providing continuous data transfer between the installa-
tions.
Note: The EVTC does not work with VLM1.
A.9.2 Particulars
The EVTC comprises a single printed circuit board.
The address of the module is defined in the Application Data for the
system, held in PROMs on the VLM.
A.9.3 Function
The EVTC continuously transmits data over a dedicated serial channel
to another EVTC.
Two forms of the data are transmitted; the True and Complement repre-
sentations of the data. These messages are formed into code words, and
the two code words are transmitted separately over the serial channel.
If in any two second period either EVTC fails to receive a correct “pair of
code words” from the serial channel, it will indicate a “Loss of Input
Channel” (LOIC) status to the HVLM by setting LOIC to logic state 0. This
status will remain until the EVTC receives a correct pair of code words.
When LOIC is set to logic state 0, the VLM ensures that all inputs derived
from the EVTC message are set to logic state 0 to ensure safety. All data
received from the EVTC during this period is ignored, and will remain so
until the LOIC status is set to logic state 1 by the receipt of valid code
words.
The EVTC derives power for its communication circuits from an exter-
nal 24 Vdc supply, generated by the OPC (as part of the VLM). This
supply is known as the Vital Serial Enable Voltage (VSEV). Removal of
this voltage positively prevents the EVTC from transmitting and receiv-
ing data. This is done when the VLM cannot assure the integrity of the
data and hence the safety of the system under failure conditions.
Removal of the VSEV occurs simultaneously with de-energising of the
OPCR.

The EVTC is processor based and it interfaces with the VLM. The proc-
essor performs self-testing, housekeeping and Health Monitoring func-
tions for the module.
A.9.4 Configuration
Transmit Clock
Many PCM systems require Tx and Rx data to be synchronised with the

PCM’s own transmit clock.
Set the Transmit Clock switch thus:
Switch Position 1 = OFF Internal clock—used when EVTC is

connected a modem.
Switch Position 1 = ON External clock—used when interfacing to

carrier communication systems that require
synchronised clocks for both transmitted and
received data.
The EVTC takes an external receive data

clock and generates both the transmit data
clock and the transmit data from it.
Applies to EVTC module (3650 1129 13) Issue

2.0 or later.
A.9.5 Indications
A.9.5.1 Start Up

A.9.5.2 Operation
A.9.5.3 Fault Codes
02 Module Type Error Replace EVTC
05 RAM Error "
09 Stack Error "
Table A20: Fault Codes—EVTC

21 Run Time Error X Replace EVTC
2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error Replace EVTC
80 True IMB Parity Error "
81 Comp IMB Parity Error "
97 Hardware Timer Error "
98 Corrupt Data or Operating Error "
99 Corrupt Data Input "
9A Primary Loc Error "
9B Corrupt Data or Transmit Error "
9C Insufficient Time Lapse "
9D True Output Parity Check Error "
9E Comp Output Parity Check Error "
Table A20: Fault Codes—EVTC (Continued)

External Connections to the EVTC are made via the SIO232 PFM.
power.
Figure A.21: External Connections—SIO232 PFM—EVTC
Pin Function
1 Chassis Ground
Table A21: DB25 Pinout—SIO232 PFM—EVTC

WESTECT Communications Module (WCM)
A.10 WESTECT Communications Module (WCM)
A.10.1 Description
The WCM enables communication of vital signal status information
from a WESTECT encoder to WESTECT OBC equipment located on a
train.
A.10.2 Particulars
The WCM comprises a single printed circuit board.
A.10.3 Function
The WCM continuously transmits data over a dedicated serial link to
track side radio communications equipment as used in the WESTECT
ATP system.
Two forms of data are transmitted; the True and Complement represen-
tations of the data. These messages are formed into one packet of code
words, and the packet is transmitted over the serial channel.
The WCM derives power for its communication circuits from an external
24 Vdc supply, generated by the OPC (as part of the VLM). This supply is
known as the Vital Serial Enable Voltage (VSEV). Removal of this volt-
age positively prevents the WCM from transmitting data. This is done
when the VLM cannot assure the integrity of the data and hence the
safety of the system under failure conditions. Removal of the VSEV
occurs simultaneously with de-energising of the OPCR.
The WCM is processor based and it interfaces with the VLM. It performs
the self-testing, housekeeping and Health Monitoring functions for the
module.
A.10.4 Configuration
None.
A.10.5 Indications
A.10.5.1 Start Up

A.10.5.2 Operation
A.10.5.3 Fault Codes

02 Module Type Error Replace WCM
05 RAM Error "
09 Stack Error "
17 Run Time Error N Replace WCM
Table A22: Fault Codes—WCM


2F Health Monitoring Scheduling Error Replace WCM
81 Codeword True Order Error "
82 Codeword Complement Order Error "
83 Codeword Pair Time Error "
84 Complement Data Parity Error "
85 True Data Parity Error Replace WCM
86 Codeword Count Error "
Table A22: Fault Codes—WCM (Continued)

External Connections to the WCM are made via the SIO232 PFM.
power.
Figure A.22: External Connections—SIO232 PFM—WCM
Pin Function
1 Chassis Ground
Table A23: DB25 Pinout—SIO232 PFM—WCM

Network Communication Diagnostic Module (NCDM)
A.11 Network Communication Diagnostic Module

(NCDM)
A.11.1 Description
The NCDM module provides network and serial interfaces, non-vital
logic processing and data logging of time stamped vital and non-vital
logic changes and WESTRACE system faults. It may be used as part of a
WESTRACE system or as a stand-alone communication and logic
processing module.
It has one network port and two external serial ports. The network port
and external serial ports are configured for function and communication
protocol by the Non-vital Configuration that is downloaded into non-
volatile memory on the module. The physical interface for each external
serial port (RS232 or RS485) is configured as part of the communication
protocol in the Non-vital Configuration.
The network can be used for a diagnostic interface. This uses the Diag-
nostic Protocol and is connected to MoviolaW or NGETLOG.
The serial ports can be used for a diagnostic interface. These use the
Diagnostic Protocol and are connected directly or through a modem to
MoviolaW or GetLOG. Software packages designed for earlier
WESTRACE diagnostic modules (eg DM or DM128) will not work with
NCDM.
A maximum of five Diagnostic Protocol (network or serial) Communica-

tion Sessions are supported by the NCDM.
The network port can be used for a control system interface. This uses
the S2 protocols (WSL or WSA). The WSA/S2 protocol can be configured
to operate as a master (client) or slave (server). The NCDM can support
up to 16 network sessions for control systems.
The network port can route vital communication between VLM6

modules. The NCDM can support up to 16 vital communication sessions.
The external serial ports can be used for a control system interface.
These use the S2 protocols (WSL or WSA) and may be configured to
emulate a WSA or WSL S2 field station or a WSA S2 office. Typically,
these ports are connected to a local control system (eg WESTCAD), a
remote CTC system or an S2 based local panel. The external serial ports
can be configured for connection to redundant bearers for external
communications availability.
The NCDM has one internal serial port (Production port) available for
commissioning purposes to configure the NCDM and upload vital and
non-vital configuration data.
Only one NCDM module may be installed in a WESTRACE system. It

occupies the slot adjacent to the VLM in housing 1.
Note: GCSS v6.0 supports the configuration of NCDM with VLM6 only.
The term ‘Non-vital Configuration’ equates to ‘CED’ in older
WESTRACE technology.
A.11.2 Particulars
A.11.2.1 Circuit Boards
The NCDM comprises:

• the main circuit board (NCDC);
• the Network Communication Diagnostic Protection and Filter
Module (NCD PFM1), which is the PFM for the NCDM.
The NCD PFM supports:

• one 10baseT Ethernet interface, type RJ45;
• two configurable serial ports, RS232-C or RS485 signal level (DB9);
• INCL.
A.11.2.2 External Ports
Table A24 shows how port numbers are allocated. Figure A.23 illustrates
the physical port connectors at the rear of the NCD PFM.
Configuration Type Used For

Port No:
2 Serial 2 Diagnostic or control system connection
3 Serial 3 "
8 IMB The IMB interface to the VLM (internal)
9 INCL Inter NCDM Communication Link (Hot Standby)
A VLM6 Dedicated interface to the VLM6 (internal)
B Network Diagnostic, control system or vital

communications
Table A24: Port Number Allocation—NCDM
1.
There are two styles of NCD PFM—see figure A.23.

Style 1: NCD PFM
RJ45 Network connection
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Optical cable connections

for Inter NCDM Communications Link (INCL)
Serial Port 2 and Serial Port 3 (DB9)
Style 2: NCDC PFM
RJ45 Network connection
Tx
Optical cable connections
Rx
Serial Port 2
Serial Port 3
Figure A.23: External Ports on the Two Styles of NCD PFM—

NCDM
A.11.2.3 Serial Control System Ports or Network Control System

Sessions
Each serial control system port or network control system session can be
connected to:
• a control centre;
• a control computer;
• S2 field stations (serial port only);
• WESTRACE Installations (for WESTRACE to WESTRACE non-vital
communication).
Network control system sessions are made over a 10 BaseT Ethernet

compliant network.
Serial control system connections can be direct through a permanently

connected modem or as a duplicated communication pair.
Network Control System Session
Each network control system can be configured as either:

• a slave (server) where the NCDM may be configured with the WSA/
S2 or WSL/S2;
• a master (client) where the NCDM may be configured with the WSA/
S2.
Individual network control sessions are configured with an individual

session ID and an individual S2 address within the S2 address range. At
least 16 network control system sessions are supported.
Serial Control System Port
Each Serial Control System port can be configured as either:

• a slave, where the NCDM operates as a WSA/S2 or WSL/S2 field
station;
• a master, where the NCDM operates as a WSA/S2 office.
Serial control ports can appear in a range of S2 addresses.
A.11.2.4 Serial Diagnostic Ports or Network Diagnostic Sessions
Up to five diagnostic communication sessions can be supported by

NCDM. These may be a combination of serial diagnostic or network diag-
nostic sessions.
Network Diagnostic Sessions
Each network diagnostic session operates as an intermittent network

connection, where the session is connected to the external diagnostic
equipment (eg MoviolaW) only when required.
No fault is logged if the session is logged off, however a fault will be

logged if this connection fails while the session is logged on.
Serial Diagnostic Ports
Each serial diagnostic port can be configured as:

a) a permanent direct connection, where the port is connected directly
to the external diagnostic equipment (eg MoviolaW).
A fault will be logged if this connection fails.
b) an intermittent connection, where the port is connected to the
external diagnostic equipment only when required.
No fault will be logged.
c) a dial-in connection, where the port is connected to a Hayes
compatible modem. Remote external diagnostic equipment can dial
in and interrogate the NCDM.

d) a dial-out connection, where dial-in is not possible, but the NCDM

will initiate a dial-out to remote external diagnostic equipment in
the event of a fault.
e) a dial-in/out connection which allows both dial-in and dial-out.
For options c), d), and e), a fault will not be logged if the external diagnos-
tic equipment hangs up, but will be logged if the NCDM cannot commu-
nicate with the modem.
A.11.2.5 Production Port
The Production port is on the front of the module. This port is used for
downloading the Non-vital Configuration from the GCSS and uploading
the Non-vital Configuration and Vital PROM Data to the ICS.
A.11.2.6 Serial Power Supply
The NCDM derives operational power for its serial communication ports
from a separate isolated power supply. The isolated power supply input
is connected to the installation 24V power supply by the connector CON3.
The ports are disabled when this power is not present.
A.11.2.7 Installation Status
The NCDM derives an indication of the status of the installation from an

OPCR switched 24 V input.
The installation status input is connected to the installations switched

24V signal by CON4.
The installation status is only used by the NCDM when configured to

operate in a hot standby system.
A.11.3 Function
The main functions of the NCDM are:
• Evaluate non-vital logic;
• Route vital communication messages from the associated VLM6 to
other WESTRACE installations and from other WESTRACE
installations to the associated VLM6;
• Exchange configured non-vital logic states with control centres,
control computers, other WESTRACE installations, external WSA/
S2 field stations and the vital processor (HVLM128, VLM5 or VLM6);
• Log all changes to vital and non-vital logic states, all detected
WESTRACE system faults and other significant operational
occurrences (known as ‘operations’);
The NCDM can store up to 250,000 change of state events, 200 system
faults and 100 operations in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM);
The logging capacity is 3 days for a small interlocking without an
external diagnostic system connected, or 6 hours for a large
interlocking without an external diagnostic system connected;
The NCDM has its own Real Time Clock for time and date stamping
of logged events, WESTRACE system faults and operations. The time

and date can be set from a control centre or through a diagnostic port;
• Allow an external diagnostic system such as MoviolaW to extract
logged data and view current logic states;
• Allow an external system to upload the Non-vital Configuration data
or Vital PROM Data.
Timestamp Synchronisation
Where a system consists of more than one WESTRACE installation, it is

important that the time of day in each installation is the same so that
their events can be correlated by time.
A typical real time clock will drift by 2 seconds a day, so two installations
may drift apart by 4 seconds a day (24 minutes over 12 months).
To ensure time synchronisation of a system consisting of more than one

WESTRACE installation, an external diagnostic system should be used
to synchronise the installation’s clocks by sending regular ‘set time’
commands.
A.11.4 Operation
The NCDM has four operating modes:
Mode Description Indications
Normal Normal operation. Watchdog LED flashes:

• green for stand-alone or
on-line operation;
• orange for standby
operation.
Maintenance Used for downloading a new Watchdog LED flashes red.

Non-vital Configuration. Display shows ‘Mnt ’
Production Used for downloading new Watchdog LED Off. Display

software. shows ‘Prd ’.
Shutdown NCDM has shutdown because Watchdog LED not flashing.

of a fatal internal fault. Display shows a 3-digit fault
code.
Table A25: Operating Modes—NCDM
Unless otherwise specified, the functionality described here relates to

Normal mode only.
A.11.4.1 Selecting Maintenance Mode
Maintenance mode is manually selected by either:

• connecting a special ‘Maintenance’ cable to the Production port and
then restarting the NCDM. See section A.11.7.7 for details, or;
• setting one of the on-board switches, then restarting the NCDM (see
“SW2 Switch Bank” on page A-100.)

A.11.4.2 Selecting Production Mode
Production mode is selected either:

• automatically, if the NCDM software is detected as being invalid, or;
• manually, using the on-board jumpers on a Mod D Rev 7 NCDC or a
pushbutton on a Mod E Rev 8 NCDC, then restarting the NCDM (see
“PROD” on page A-99).
The NCDC is the NCDM’s main circuit board. Two styles of NCDC are
available:
• Mod D Rev 7 NCDC (figure A.24)—set modes using jumper pins
• Mod E Rev 8 NCDC (figure A.25)—set modes using pushbuttons
A.11.5.1 Hardware Settings
Figure A.24 shows the switch banks and jumpers used to configure the
Mod D Rev 7 NCDC. Number 1 switch or jumper pin is indicated by a
small triangle symbol.
1 8 1 8
OFF OFF
CEDVER SW2
Non-vital Config- Maintenance

uration Version switch bank (SW2)
switch bank
(CEDVER)
Production jumper
(PROD)
3
PROD
2
1
3
Password 2
1
jumper
PSWD
(PSWD) 3
2
1
2
1
Figure A.24: Configuration Switches and Jumpers—Mod D Rev 7

NCDC
Figure A.25 shows the switch banks and pushbuttons used to configure
the Mod E Rev 8 NCDC.
Production pushbutton
(PROD)
Password pushbutton
(PSWD)
Non-vital Configuration Version

switch bank
(CEDVER or SW1)
Maintenance
switch bank
(GEN or SW2)
Switch 1 is the least significant bit

ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON (down) = zero
Figure A.25: Configuration Switches and Pushbuttons—

Mod E Rev 8 NCDC
Jumpers and Pushbuttons
PROD
To enter Production mode:

• short pins 1 & 2 of the PROD jumper—Mod D Rev 7 NCDC, or
• hold the PROD pushbutton down—Mod E Rev 8 NCDC
while restarting the NCDM.
PSWD
You can change the Diagnostic Mode passwords during operation of the
NCDM. To reset them to the values stored in the Non-vital Configuration:
• short pins 1 & 2 of the PSWD jumper—Mod D Rev 7 NCDC, or
• hold the PROD pushbutton down—Mod E Rev 8 NCDC
while restarting the NCDM.
Note: Mod D Rev 7 NCDC only: Store the PROD and PSWD jumpers on pins
2 and 3 when the modes are not set.

Switches
CEDVER Switch Bank
The NCDM uses the version number set by the CEDVER switch bank to
ensure that the correct Non-vital Configuration is stored in PROM.
Switch 1 is the least significant bit and switch ON is zero.
Note: CED version is hex coded on the switch bank.
SW2 Switch Bank2
This switch bank is used for the following purposes:

• putting the NCDM into Maintenance mode;
• setting the data transfer rate for the Production port;
• setting the IP Address used in a hot standby system.
Set the switches according to table A26 and restart the NCDM to activate
the desired configuration.
Switch Setting
1 OFF for Normal mode

ON to select Maintenance Mode
2 OFF for 9600 bits per second

ON for 115200 bits per second
3 OFF for Secondary IP address

ON for Primary IP Address (hot
standby system only)
4–8 Not used. Normally left in the Off

position.
Table A26: Switch Bank 2—Valid Settings—NCDM
The NCDM will stay in Maintenance mode until switch 1 is returned to

OFF and the system is rebooted.
A.11.5.2 Non-vital Configuration
The majority of the NCDM configuration is done using the GCSS and is
stored in the Non-vital Configuration data.
The Non-vital Configuration includes:

• default passwords;
• initial values for non-vital logic states;
• non-vital application logic and timer details;
• Configuration details for each serial port, such as:
• protocol;
• basic serial parameters (eg data transfer rate, handshaking,
RS 232c or RS 485 signal level);
2.
Also labelled GEN on Mod E Rev 8 NCDCs (Figure A.25)
• clock signal usage (input, output or reconstructed from data);

• protocol parameters (eg data word length, addresses, inter-scan
delay);
• default dial-out telephone numbers (diagnostic ports only);
• I/O bit mappings (control system ports only);
• Configuration details for each network session, such as:
• session ID;
• protocol;
• protocol parameters;
• I/O bit mappings (control system sessions only).
A.11.5.3 Replacing the NCDM
A replacement NCDM must be configured to suit the particular location.

Usually this means the replacement must be configured to exactly match
the NCDM being replaced.
Before beginning, you must:

authority’s safety requirements
b) Power down the WESTRACE installation.
Remove the NCDM from the WESTRACE Housing

a) Remove the front panel of the WESTRACE housing.
b) Observe the anti-static procedures.
c) Remove the NCDM from the housing using the built in card ejectors.
Where the NCDM is used in a WESTRACE system that includes a
VLM6, both the NCDM and VLM6 must be removed.
d) Separate the NCDC from the VLC6.

NCDC VLC6 VLC6

(Mod D Rev 7 shown) (inside view) (outside view)
1 3 2
Remove nuts (5) from
stand-offs Pins (1) engage connector (2) through holes (3)
Figure A.26: Separating the NCDC and VLC6
Install the Non-vital Configuration
There are five parts to this task:

a) Ensuring you have the right equipment;
b) Setting the Non-vital Configuration version switches on the NCDC;
c) Switching the NCDM to Maintenance Mode;
d) Installing the NCDM into the housing;
e) Down loading the new Non-vital Configuration to the NCDM.
WESTRACE must not be controlling an interlocking while down-

loading a Non-vital Configuration.
Disconnect the network cable from the NCD PFM prior to power-up
of a newly-installed NCDM. Otherwise an unintended IP Address in
the NCDM Non-vital Configuration may cause a shutdown of an
adjacent NCDM on the network due to detection of a duplicated
IP Address.
Equipment Required
• A personal computer (PC) loaded with:
• the Graphical Configuration Subsystem (GCSS version 6 or
later);
• the correct Non-vital Configuration for the NCDM;
• the Installation Check System (ICS).
• A ‘standard’ cable as described in figure A.37 to connect the serial
port on the PC to the Production port on the NCDC.

Alternatively, a ‘maintenance’ cable (figure A.37) may be used. The
‘maintenance’ cable configuration causes the NCDM to
automatically start in ‘Maintenance’ mode. See “Setting the
Maintenance Mode” (page A-103) and “When the maintenance cable
was used to set Maintenance Mode” (page A-105).
• A copy of the WESTRACE Graphical Configuration Subsystem
Manual.
Setting Non-vital Configuration version switches
The NCDM requires that the Non-vital Configuration version must be

that set by the CEDVER switches. This protects against loading an incor-
rect version. See figure A.27.
Note: CED version is hex coded on the CEDVER switch bank.
Set the switches on the NCDC to define the Non-vital Configuration

version specified on the GCSS printout for the Non-vital Configuration.
Switch 1 is the least significant bit. Switch ON is zero.
For example, to set Non-vital Configuration version 1, you set switch 1

OFF and switches 2-8 ON (figure A.27). To set Non-vital Configuration
version 5, switches 1 and 3 are OFF, all others are ON.
Switch 1 OFF (1) Switches 2-8 ON (zero)
Figure A.27: Setting Non-vital Configuration—Version 1 Example

(Mod D Rev 7 NCDC shown)
Setting the Maintenance Mode
Select ‘Maintenance mode’ either by connecting a maintenance cable to

the Production port, or by setting switch 1 of switch bank SW2 to ON. See
section A.11.4.1 for details.

Refitting the NCDM
Refit the NCDM into the housing. Insertion is the reverse of removal
described in “Remove the NCDC from the WESTRACE Housing”
(page A-101) with the exception of not replacing the front panel.
Downloading the Non-vital Configuration

a) Connect the cable of choice between the Production port and the PC;
see figure A.28.
b) Power up WESTRACE.
Ensure that the NCDM has entered Maintenance mode (the
watchdog LED should be flashing red and the fault display should
show ‘MNT ’).
c) Download the Non-vital Configuration according to the instructions
in the WESTRACE Graphical Configuration Subsystem Manual.
Maintenance Cable
See figure A.37
Figure A.28: Production Port—Connecting—NCDM
Verify the Data
The Non-vital Configuration must be verified before the system is

returned to service.
a) Ensure the NCDM is in maintenance mode and the PC is connected
to the NCDM Production port;
b) Run ICS according to the instructions in the WESTRACE
Installation Check System Manual;
c) Complete procedural checking and sign off as per the WESTRACE
Installation Check System Manual.
Restore the System
When the maintenance cable was used to set Maintenance Mode

a) Power down WESTRACE;
b) Remove the cable from the Production port;
c) Refit the front panel to the housing(s);
d) Power up WESTRACE;
e) Allow WESTRACE to run for several minutes; ensure that no fault
codes are displayed;
f) Advise the Signaller of completion.
When Switch Bank SW2 was used to set Maintenance Mode

a) Power down WESTRACE.
b) Remove the NCDM from the housing.
c) Set switch 1 of switch bank SW2 to OFF (Maintenance Mode OFF).
See figure A.24 or A.25.
d) Refit the NCDM into the housing. Replacement of the NCDM is the
reverse of the procedure described in “Remove the NCDC from the
WESTRACE Housing” (page A-101).
e) Refit the front panel to the housing(s).
f) Power up WESTRACE.
g) Allow WESTRACE to run for several minutes; ensure that no fault
codes are displayed.
h) Advise the Signaller of completion
A.11.5.4 Battery Installation
A lithium battery is used to maintain logged data in non-volatile memory

and the real-time clock when the NCDM is powered down. The battery
has a very long life and in normal circumstances it is unlikely to require
replacement. The NCDM is usually shipped with the battery connected.
To replace the battery:

a) Have a replacement battery of the same type as the original plus
cable ties readily at hand. See figure A.29.
b) Snip the cable ties holding the old battery to the printed circuit
board.
c) Remove the battery lead from the pins.
For a standing battery connector (figure A.29), first separate the two
circuit boards by removing the five stand-off screws then releasing
the connector near the centre of the boards (figure A.26).
d) Connect the replacement battery to the pins. You have a short period
to do this before data is lost.
e) Fix the replacement battery to the circuit board using the new cable
ties.

f) Snip off the excess length of cable ties.
Standing battery connector
Lying battery connector
Figure A.29: Lithium Battery—Two Connector Types—NCDM
Observe the instructions elsewhere in this manual.
A.11.6 Indications
The ‘user interface’ of the NCDM comprises LEDs and a four digit alpha-
numeric display.
Internal Fault LED

D1
D2 VLM6 Status LED
Alphanumeric Fault display D3
D4
NCDC Watchdog LED
Production port VLM6 Watchdog LED
NCDC VLM6
(Mod D Rev 7
shown)
Figure A.30: User Interface—NCDC and VLM6—NCDM
A.11.6.1 Network Communication Diagnostic Card LEDs
The NCDC has two front panel LEDs:

• Internal fault LED (red)—illuminated whenever there is a non-fatal
internal NCDM fault. These faults require attention, but are not
serious enough to cause the NCDM to shutdown;
• Watch dog LED (normally green)—flashes at a regular interval if all
is well with the NCDM. During the first minute or so of operation, the
LED may flash at a faster than normal rate. It should then flash at a
similar rate as the watchdog LED on the VLM;
This LED flashes:
• orange when the NCDM is in the Standby Installation of a Hot
Standby System;
• red when the NCDM is in Maintenance mode.

A.11.6.2 NCD PFM LEDs
Installation status (D8)
5 V power supply from NCDC (D9)

Ethernet Tx/Rx (D5)
Serial Port 3 power (D10)
Serial Port 2
power (D11)
Serial Port 2 Tx/Rx (D6) Serial Port 3 Tx/Rx (D7)
Figure A.31: User Interface—NCD PFM—NCDM
The NCD PFM has 7 LEDs:

• Serial LED (D6 & D7)—for each of the 2 serial ports. Flashes red when
data is transmitted and flashes green when data is received;
• Network LED (D5)—for the network port. Flashes red when data is
transmitted and flashes green when data is received;
• Power Indicator LED (D10 & D11) (green)—for each of the serial
ports. Indicates the +24 V comms power supply is present;
• Power Indicator LED (D9) (green)—indicates the +5 V power supply
is present;
• Installation Status LED (D8) (green)—indicates the NCDM is in the
on-line installation.
See section A.11.6.5 for further information about these indicators.
A.11.6.3 Alphanumeric Display
The alphanumeric display can only show one fault at any time. However,
all fault codes which occur are logged by the NCDM and can be examined
using external diagnostic equipment.
Shutdown Mode
The alphanumeric display will show the applicable fault code if the
NCDM shuts down because of an internal fault. See table A34.
Normal Mode
Within the first 12 seconds of the NCDM operating in this mode, the
alphanumeric display will show start-up information (see section
A.11.6.4) and then it will be blank unless a fault is detected.
During operation, a ‘non-fatal’ fault may occur which will cause the
NCDM to display a fault code but continue to operate. In the event of
multiple faults being present simultaneously, the NCDM will display the
code for the first of the following that applies:
a) ‘TIME’ if the NCDM real time clock has not been set;
b) a non-fatal NCDM fault code, see table A35;
c) ‘FLT ’when more than one non-fatal faults have occurred;
d) ‘DIAG’ when one or more WESTRACE system faults have not been
uploaded by the external diagnostic equipment;
e) ‘BAT ’ if the NCDM battery voltage is low.
Maintenance Mode
The alphanumeric display will show the following when the NCDM is in
this mode:
• ‘MNT ’ when ready to download a new Non-vital Configuration;
• progress messages during and after a Non-vital Configuration
download.
A.11.6.4 Start Up
The alphanumeric display shows a sequence of information (in hexadec-

imal) during start-up.
Time after Information Details

Start-up
0–4 secs Display shows various states followed by

‘RUN’ to indicate the application software
is running.
4–6 secs– Lamp test All segments/dots illuminate to verify they

are functional.
6–9 secs. Backplane address Display shows ‘A hh’ where ‘hh’ is the
backplane address of the slot holding the
Network Diagnostic Card (NCDC).
9–12 secs. Software version Display shows ‘V hh’ where ‘hh’ is the
version number of the NCDM software.
Table A27: Start-up Display Sequence—NCDM
The NCDM will indicate incompatible application and bootloader soft-

ware by displaying ‘Err ’.

A.11.6.5 Operation
A correctly operating NCDM will show the following:
Indicator Condition
Internal Fault LED Off
Alphanumeric display Blank
Watchdog LED Regularly flashing green when in an on-line

installation.
Regularly flashing orange when in a stand-by
installation.
Serial LED(s) Flashes green when the NCDM is receiving messages

though the associated serial port.
These LEDs will flash irrespective of whether the
message is addressed to the NCDM.
Flashes red when the NCDM is transmitting
messages through the associated serial port.
Network LED(s) Flashes green when the NCDM is receiving messages

though the associated network port.
message is addressed to the NCDM.
Flashes red when the NCDM is transmitting
messages through the associated network port.
Power Indicators Steady green
Installation status Steady green for on-line installation in stand-by

system.
Table A28: Operation Indicators—Normal—NCDM
Note: The watchdog LED flashes red when the NCDM is in Maintenance
mode.
The Serial and Network LEDs may appear to be ON rather than
flashing when the data rate is high.
A.11.6.6 Fault Detection
A.11.6.6.1 WESTRACE Module Faults
During the first 16 seconds after power up, all WESTRACE modules
display in sequence via their diagnostic LEDs:
• backplane address;
• software version;
• the value 00 (all LEDs off) to indicate ‘no fault’.
During operation, each module will generate a non-zero fault code if a

fault is detected.
The NCDM polls each module in turn to read this information, and will
record any changes. These changes are stored in the order that they are
polled by NCDM, which may not necessarily be the order in which they
occurred.
A.11.6.6.2 NCDM Faults
In the event of an internal NCDM fault, the NCDM will either:

• display a code on the alphanumeric display, log a fault, and continue
operating. This action is taken for ‘non-fatal’ faults (such as a comms
port failure, low battery, or date/time not set), which do not
compromise safe operation of the NCDM;
• shutdown the NCDM and display a code on the alphanumeric
display. This action is taken for a ‘fatal’ fault (such as software or
hardware malfunctioning). A fault will be logged when the system is
restarted.
When an internal fault is the cause of an NCDM shutdown:

a) the NCDM will lose communications with the VLM;
b) the VLM will display a fault code (typically 34h) because of the
communications loss but the VLM will keep running because the
NCDM is a non-vital module;
The only way to clear the VLM fault code is to restart the
WESTRACE system.
At this point, all NCDM communications ports are disabled and will stay
that way until WESTRACE is restarted.
The alphanumeric display comprises four digits; D1, D2, D3 and D4

reading from top to bottom on the display (figure A.32). Figures A.33 to
A.35 show the alphanumeric display being read left to right where the left
position corresponds with the top position in figure A.30.
D1 D2 D3 D4
Figure A.32: Four Digit Alphanumeric Display—NCDM
The hexadecimal numbers shown by this display identify the following:

• the class of fault (internal NCDM fault, port fault, or module network
session fault);
• the port number and module address or network session, if
appropriate;
• a code identifying the fault.
Digit D1 identifies the port. The other three digits (D2–D4) display:
• the fault code;
• module address, or;
• network session number.
The following nomenclature is used in the diagrams and tables below:

p port number (hex)

mm module or session (hex)
f fault code (hex)
A.11.6.7.1 Port Faults
Digit D1 identifies the faulty port. Digits D2 and D3 are set to zero and
digit D4 is the fault code.
p 0 0 f
Port number (2-B hex) Fault code (0,1 hex)
Figure A.33: Alphanumeric Display—Port Fault—NCDM
The port number used are:

2 = Serial port 2;
3 = Serial port 3;
8 = IMB port;
9 = INCL port;
A = VLM6 port;
B = Network port.
For example, A001 indicates a fault code 1 on port A (the VLM6 port).
Port Codes in General
Table A29 shows valid port fault codes.
p000 Port OK None.
p001 Port time out or fail: Serial or network LED flashing green:
• check the port configuration in Non-vital
a. Timeout when waiting for an incoming
Configuration;
message (serial server port).
• replace the NCDM if the configuration is
b. Failure to get a response from any exter- correct.
nal server (serial client port).
Serial or network LED off:
c. Detected failure of Ethernet link (net- • check the comms link cabling and con-
work port) nections;
• replace the protection module or the
NCDC.
Table A29: Fault Codes—Port Codes in General—NCDM
External Port, Module and Session Codes
A001 VLM6 port time-out. This code is displayed if the VLM shuts
IMB port time-out. down for any reason.
8001
Try the following if this code is on display
and the VLM is still running:
a. Restart WESTRACE.
b. Check to ensure the VLM and NCDM
Non-vital Configurations are consistent
with respect to transfer states passed be-
tween them. Normally GCSS ensures
that this is the case.
c. Check to ensure that only one NCDM and
no DM is installed.
d. Replace the NCDM.
9001 INCL port time-out. An NCDM in an On-line installation

displays this code if it does not receive an
INCL acknowledgment message from the
NCDM in the Stand-by installation.
Try the following if this code is on display:
a. Check the INCL Rx link to the NCDM in
the On-line installation;
b. Check the INCL Tx link on the NCDM in
the Stand-by installation;
c. Replace the NCD PFM in the On-line in-
stallation.
d. Check the INCL Rx link to the NCDM in
the Stand-by installation;
e. Check the INCL Tx link on the NCDM in
the On-line installation;
f. Replace the NCD PFM in the Stand-by in-
stallation.
Table A30: Fault Codes—Ext. Port—Module and Session—NCDM
Internal Port Codes
The following code is not displayed. It is reported in the fault log only.
CODE DESCRIPTION
p000 The port p has recovered and is now operational.
Table A31: Fault Codes—Internal Port—NCDM
A.11.6.7.2 Module or Session Faults
Digit D1 identifies the port to which the module-network session is

connected. Digits D2 and D3 identify the module address or session
number, and digit D4 is the fault code.

p m m f
}
Port number (2-B hex) Fault code (8,9 hex)
Module address or
session number (00-FF hex)
Figure A.34: Alphanumeric Display—Module or Session Fault—

NCDM
The NCDM reports on faults for connected module addresses or session

numbers. The fault code is interpreted from the alphanumeric display as
described here. Module or session faults in the range:
00-7F are reported by the NCDM in an on-line WESTRACE,
80-FF are reported by the NCDM in a standby WESTRACE.
In all cases, a fault code of zero means ‘no fault’.
For example, a fault code of ‘21B8’ on an NCDM indicates a fault code 8 on

the module with address 0x1B (serial port 2).
Table A32 shows valid fault codes.
pmm9 Communication to an address has timed Slave port

out.
a. Check that the control system master is
Slave port—timeout when waiting for a sending data to this address or session
valid message addressed to address or
ID.
session ID mm (hex) on port p (hex).
Master port—timeout waiting for a valid b. Check the addresses or session IDs stored
response from the S2 field address or in the Non-vital Configuration to see if
session ID mm (hex) on port p (hex). they match the addresses or session IDs
sent by the office.
Master port
a. Check that the slave at this address or
session ID is functioning correctly.
b. Check that the addresses or session IDs
stored in the Non-vital Configuration
match those of the connected slave.
Table A32: Fault Codes—Module or Session—NCDM
Other Module or Session Codes
The following code is not displayed. It is reported in the fault log only.
CODE(H) DESCRIPTION
pmm8 Address or session ID mm (hex) on port p (hex) has recovered from a fault and
is now operational.
Table A33: Fault Codes—Other—Module or Session—NCDM
A.11.6.7.3 Internal faults
Digit D1 is blank and Digits D2 to D4 display the fault code (000-FFF).
0 f f f
}
Fault code (000-FFF hex)
Figure A.35: Alphanumeric Display—Internal Fault—NCDM
The first action should be to restart WESTRACE. Next, find the displayed
fault code in the tables below and take the recommended action. All of
these fault codes, plus any read from the fault latches of other
WESTRACE modules are logged to the NCDM fault buffer in the order
they are detected by the NCDM.
Fatal NCDM Fault Codes
These faults cause the NCDM to shut down.
003 Application Checksum Error Replace NCDM
004 Stack Guard Band Error "
005 RAM Error "
009 Stack Error "
080 Non-vital Configuration checksum error Download new Non-vital Configuration
084 Non-vital Configuration version number Confirm that the version switches are
error correctly set.
Download new Non-vital Configuration if
the switches are correctly set.
100 Build error a. Check the NCDM configuration parame-

ters for their range and correct any that
are out of range.
b. Ensure that all WSA/S2 protocol ses-
sions over the network port have unique
housing addresses for client and server
sessions.
c. Ensure that parameters for the vital com-
munication ports (configured for the
VLM6) are matched by the NCDM config-
uration.
d. Re-build the NCDM configuration and
load it onto an NCDM.
101 Out of memory Replace NCDM
102 Operating system error "
103 Internal error "
104 Task suspended Replace NCDM
Table A34: Fault Codes—Fatal—NCDM

105 NVRAM error "
107 Comms buffer error "
108 Non-vital Configuration format version Download new Non-vital Configuration

error
109 Watchdog restart Replace NCDM
10A No VLM Non-vital Configuration copy Restart WESTRACE
10B Wrong VLM Non-vital Configuration copy "
10C VLM interface versions mismatch Check the NCDM and VLM Non-vital
Configuration versions.
10D VLM address mismatch Check the NCDM Non-vital Configuration

and WESTRACE installation details
10F Wrong IMB slot Move NCDM to the correct backplane slot
112 Duplicate IP Address a. Check the NCDM Non-vital Configura-

tion for correct IP address.
b. Check other equipment connected to the
network for a duplicate IP address.
In a Stand-by system:
Ensure the secondary IP address
configuration switch is set correctly.
113 Duplicate Session Id a. Ensure that the Application Session Id is

unique for all sessions over the network
port.
b. Ensure that each diagnostic port address
is unique and different from any Applica-
tion Session Id.
c. Correct the NCDM configuration where
necessary, then re-build it and load it
onto an NCDM.
Table A34: Fault Codes—Fatal—NCDM (Continued)
Non-fatal NCDM Fault Codes
These faults are logged and displayed by the NCDM. The NCDM contin-
ues operating.
10E IMB data error No action required.
111 Timing error "
800 NVRAM is invalid. Could be due to an old or faulty battery.

Replace the battery when the error occurs
on start-up, otherwise replace the NCDC.
Note: NVRAM is always cleared when the
NCDM is configured or re-configured; such
an error is logged upon first start-up.
801 Event log store was invalid, therefore reset. "
802 Fault log store was invalid, therefore reset. "
Table A35: Fault Codes—Non-fatal—NCDM
803 Operations log store was invalid, therefore "

reset.
804 SR Latch output states in NVRAM are "

invalid.
805 Phone numbers in the NVRAM are invalid. Could be due to an old or faulty battery.
Replace the battery when the error occurs
on start-up, otherwise replace the NCDC.
Note: NVRAM is always cleared when the
NCDM is configured or re-configured; such
an error is logged upon first start-up.
806 Passwords in the NVRAM are invalid "
810 Error reading from fault bus or reading Check that all cards are in place and if the
from a backplane address. (FDet read error is still persistent, replace the NCDM.
error).
900 Vital message length or small channel port Check configuration of vital sessions on the
number out of range for messages to VLM6. network port.
901 Invalid BCC on non-vital message from Check configuration of the VLM6 interface.
VLM6.
902 Big channel message length out of range on "

message from VLM6.
903 NCDM could not obtain DPRAM Check the VLM6-NCDM interface; replace
semaphore. one or other of the modules.
904 Error in Hot Stand-by INCL. Check INCL hardware. Ensure that both
NCDMs have the same configuration.
90C Invalid session number. Ensure the same Session ID is used for
connecting installations.
90D Message delayed. Check network hardware.
90E Message repeated or earlier. "
90F Session occupied. Check for unexpected equipment on the

network. Ensure that only one remote
installation is connected at any time (for
same Port ID).
910 Session or IP changed. No action required.
911 Invalid Rx timestamp. Check network hardware.
BAT Low battery Replace battery
F11 Main cycle not synchronized Check the NCDM and VLM Non-vital
(NCDM cannot keep up with VLM.) Configurations.
F21 Software version number lost Replace NCDM
F22 Module information error "
F23 Fault bus error "
F24 Fault detection NVRAM error "
TIME Time has not been set Set correct time through MoviolaW, CTC or
Getlog. It is possible to set the time via the
S2 protocols.
DIAG There are faults stored in the Fault Buffer. Connect or check and restart an external
diagnostic system and request the fault
codes from the Fault Buffer.
Table A35: Fault Codes—Non-fatal—NCDM (Continued)

Other NCDM Codes
The following codes are not displayed. They are reported in the fault log
only.
CODE(H) DESCRIPTION
F00 Recovered from low battery condition
F01 Low battery (corresponds to ‘BAT’ display)
F10 Recovered from VLM out-of-sync error
F30 Time has been set, i.e. an invalid time/date error has been corrected
F31 Date/time not set (corresponds to ‘TIME’ display)
F40 Network port re-enabled
F41 Network port disabled
F50 Vital link up
F51 Vital link down
Table A36: Fault Codes—Other (Not Displayed)—NCDM
Style 1: NCD PFM
Network Connector (RJ45)
Tx Inter NCDM Comms Link (INCL) (Optical)
Rx Inter NCDM Comms Link (INCL) (Optical)
Serial Ports, 2 off (DB9 Connectors)
Serial Power Connector

Installation Status Connector
Serial Port 2 Serial Port 3
Serial Power Connector Installation Status Connector

(+22 to +30 V) Pin 1 Pin 2 (0 V)
(0V) Pin 2 Pin 1 (+22 to +30 V)
Installation Status
Style 2: NCDC PFM
Network
Tx
Rx
Serial Port 2
Serial Port 3
Serial
Power
Figure A.36: External Connectors on the Two Styles of

NCD PFM—NCDM
A.11.7.1 Serial Power Connector
Table A37 and figure A.36 show the serial power terminals for a Style 1
NCD PFM (via a Klippon removable screw terminal plug). For Style 2
(NCDC PFM), these terminals are brought to the board’s connector panel
and labelled PWR.
NCD PFM Pin Number Signal

(see figure A.36, Style 1)
1 +22 to +30 V
2 Common (0V)
Table A37: Serial Power Connector Pinout—NCD PFM—NCDM

A.11.7.2 Installation Status Connector
Table A38 and figure A.36 show the installation status terminals for a
Style 1 NCD PFM (via a Klippon removable screw terminal plug). For
Style 2 (NCDC PFM), these terminals are brought to the board’s connec-
tor panel and labelled STA.
NCD PFM Pin Number Signal

(see figure A.36, Style 1)
1 +22 to +30 V
2 Common (0V)
Table A38: Installation Status Connector Pinout—NCD PFM—

NCDM
A.11.7.3 Serial Connectors
The serial interface is a pair of male DB9 connectors configured as either

RS232 or RS485 ( figure A.36). The DB9 on the left is serial port 2, and the
DB9 on the right (closest to the PCB) is serial port 3.
RS232-C Connection
Pin Number Signal Name Signal Source
1 DCD External equipment
2 RxD External equipment
3 TxD NCDM
4 DTR NCDM
5 ISOGND (Common)
6 CLKOUT NCDM
7 RTS NCDM
8 CTS External equipment
9 CLKIN External equipment
Table A39: DB9 Pinout—RS232 Connection—NCD PFM—NCDM
RS485 Connection
1 RxD– External equipment
2 RxD+ External equipment
3 TxD+ NCDM
4 TxD– NCDM
5 ISOGND (Common)
6 CLKOUT+ NCDM
7 CLKOUT– NCDM
8 CLKIN– External equipment
9 CLKIN+ External equipment
A.11.7.4 Network Connector
The network interface is an RJ45 connector with the following configura-

tion:
1 Tx+ NCDM
2 Tx- NCDM
3 Rx+ External Equipment
4 Not used -
5 Not used -
6 Rx- External Equipment
7 Not used -
8 Not used -
Table A41: RJ45 Pinout—Network Connection—NCD PFM—

NCDM
A.11.7.5 INCL Connector
The INCL interface comprises a transmit (White) and receive (Black)

fibre optic connectors. Figure A.36 shows these connectors. The INCL
interface is designed for a 2.2 mm outside diameter fibre with a 1 mm
polymer fibre core. The transmitter and receiver connections are
designed such that no special tooling is required to achieve optical termi-
nation.
This port is a male DB9 connector on the front edge of the card (see figure
A.28). Signal levels are to RS232-C standard and the connector pinout is
shown in table A42. This port is only enabled when the NCDM is in Main-
tenance mode.
Pin Number Signal Comments
1 N/C
2 RxD input
3 TxD output
Table A42: DB9 Pinout—Production Port—NCDM

Pin Number Signal Comments
4 N/C
5 Common
6 N/C
7 RTS output (Always active)
8 MAINT input (Selects maintenance mode)
9 SPEED input (Selects maintenance mode data

transfer rate)
Table A42: DB9 Pinout—Production Port—NCDM (Continued)
A.11.7.7 Cabling Details
A cable with any of the configurations in figure A.37 will allow a personal
computer to connect to the:
• Production port (a DB9 connector on the front edge of the NCDC);
• Serial diagnostic port, if configured (a DB9 connector at the rear of
the housing).
Either a standard serial cable or a maintenance cable can be connected

to the diagnostic port. The interconnection of pins 7, 8 and 9 on the main-
tenance cable has no effect when connected to a serial diagnostic port.
Plugging a maintenance cable into the Production port and restarting

the WESTRACE installation will cause the NCDM to switch to its Main-
tenance Mode of operation. The wiring of the cable determines the data
transfer rate as follows:
• A maintenance cable with interconnection of pins 7, 8 and 9 will
cause the NCDM to select the 115 kbps data transfer rate;
• A maintenance cable without pin 9 connected to pins 7 and 8 will
cause the NCDM to select the 9.6 kbps data transfer rate.
Production or Diagnostic Port Personal Computer

DB9 Female DB9 Female
Pin Pin
2 3
3 2
5 5
Standard
Cable Production or Diagnostic Port Personal Computer
Pin Pin
2 2
3 3
{
5 7
Production Port
DB9 Female
Pin
}
Maintenance 2 Connections
Cable 3 as above
5
{
Pins 7 and 8 7
interconnected 8
at this end Interconnect pin 7, 8 & 9 for
9
115 kbps transfer rate
Figure A.37: Cable Configuration Details—NCDM
A.11.7.8 Connecting a Diagnostic System
Most WESTRACE installations will have a permanently connected Movi-

olaW. An installation can be configured to allow remote access via Hayes
compatible modem or through the network.
Types of Diagnostic System
Two diagnostic systems are available:

• MoviolaW—Windows based logging and display utility;
Provides the following services:
• Real time graphical display of the state of the interlocking;
• Records for later playback, events (logic state changes) which
occur after MoviolaW commences running;
• Extraction of historical fault information from an NCDM
(although not historical event or operation information);
• Basic maintenance functions such as setting the time and
displaying communication statistics;
• GETLOG—a command line utility for serial communications,
NGETLOG—a command line utility for network communications;
Provide the following services:
• Extraction of historical and real time event, fault and operation
information which is displayed and stored in text form;
displaying communication statistics;
• Simpler to install and configure than MoviolaW;
• Can support larger systems than MoviolaW.

Requirements
You will need:

• A personal computer (PC) loaded with MoviolaW or GETLOG or
NGETLOG;
• The MoviolaW display files for the particular installation, plus the
following configuration files:
• *.ins (for vital installation);
• *.ncd (for non-vital (NCDM) installation);
• *.wip (for both vital and non-vital installations);
• *.imp (for vital installation).
• For GETLOG and NGETLOG, it is useful to have the Vital and Non-
vital Configuration image (.img) files for the installation;
• The passwords for accessing the particular NCDM;
For MoviolaW, the passwords for a particular NCDM are stored in
the MoviolaW .ini file, and are configured using the MoviolaW
NCDM driver software;
For GETLOG and NGETLOG, the password must be specified on the
command line;
• A cable to connect between:
• the serial port(s) on the PC and the serial Diagnostic port ( figure
A.37), or;
• the network port on the PC and a network hub associated with the
WESTRACE installation;
• The user manual for the chosen diagnostic system.
Procedure
a) Connect the PC to a configured diagnostic port or network session at
the rear of the housing. See figure A.36 and refer to the local
documentation;
b) Start up the chosen diagnostic system;
c) Follow the guidelines for fault finding.
Non-vital Communications and Diagnostic Module (NVC/DM)
A.12 Non-vital Communications and Diagnostic

Module (NVC/DM)
A.12.1 Description
The NVC/DM module provides multiple serial interfaces, non-vital logic
processing and data logging of time stamped vital and non-vital logic
changes and WESTRACE system faults. It may be used as part of a
WESTRACE system or as a stand-alone communication and logic
processing module.
It has one configuration communication port and up to six external I/O

ports. Each port is configured for function and communication protocol
by the Non-vital Configuration that is downloaded into non-volatile
memory on the module. The physical interface for each port is config-
ured by a separate plug-on daughter board.
Up to three of the ports can be used for a diagnostic interface. These use
the Diagnostic protocol and are connected directly or through a modem
to MoviolaW or GETLOG. Software packages designed for earlier
WESTRACE diagnostic modules (eg DM and DM128) will not work with
NVC/DM.
The remaining ports use either S2 protocol (WSL or WSA) and may be
configured to emulate a WESTRONIC S2 field station or a WSA S2 office.
Typically, these ports are connected to a local control system (eg WEST-
CAD), a remote CTC system or an S2 based local panel. The ports may be
configured for connection to redundant bearers for external communica-
tions availability.
Only one NVC/DM module may be installed in a WESTRACE system.

Normally it occupies the two slots (4 and 5) adjacent to the VLM in hous-
ing 1.
Note: The NVC/DM only works with the HVLM128 and VLM5.
The NVC/DM has been validated for Hot Standby operation but only
as a diagnostic module (emulating a DM128 or DM5).
The term ‘Non-vital Configuration’ equates to ‘CED’ for older
WESTRACE technology.
A.12.2 Particulars
A.12.2.1 Circuit Boards
The NVC/DM comprises:

• two main circuit boards:
• Logic Evaluation Card (LEC);
• Communications Interface Module Filter and Interface Module
(CIMFIM);

• up to six I/O daughter boards;

• the Communications Interface Module Protection Module (CIMPM)
which is the PFM for the NVC/DM.
Each daughter board:

• provides the physical interface for either a diagnostic or telemetry
serial port;
• provides either of RS232-C or RS485 signal levels, type SDB232 and
SDB485 respectively.
A.12.2.2 External Ports
Table A43 shows how port numbers are allocated. Figure A.50 illustrates
the physical port connectors at the rear of the CIMPM.
Port No:1 Type Used For
1 - Do not use.
2 Serial Diagnostic or non-vital telemetry connection
3 " "
4 " "
5 " Non-vital telemetry connection only
6 " "
7 " "
8 IMB The IMB interface to the VLM (internal)
Table A43: Allocation of Port Numbers—NVC/DM

1. See figure A.50.
Telemetry Ports
Each telemetry port can be connected to:

• a control centre;
• a control computer;
• S2 field stations.
Telemetry connections can be direct through a permanently connected

modem.
Each telemetry port may be configured as either:

• a slave port, where the NVC/DM operates as a WSA/S2 or WSL/S2
field station;
• a master port, where the NVC/DM operates as a WSA/S2 office.
NVC/DM telemetry ports can appear as a range of S2 addresses.
Diagnostic Ports
Each diagnostic port can be configured as:

a) a permanent direct connection, where the port is connected directly
to the external diagnostic equipment (eg MoviolaW);
A fault will be logged if this connection fails;
b) an intermittent connection, where the port is connected to the
external diagnostic equipment only when required;
No fault will be logged;
c) a dial-in connection, where the port is connected to a Hayes
compatible modem. Remote external diagnostic equipment can dial
in and interrogate the NVC/DM;
d) a dial-out connection, where dial-in is not possible, but the NVC/DM
will initiate a dial-out to remote external diagnostic equipment in
the event of a fault;
e) a dial-in/out connection which allows both dial-in and dial-out.
For options c), d), and e), a fault will not be logged if the external diagnos-
tic equipment hangs up, but will be logged if the NVC/DM cannot
communicate with the modem.
The Production Port is on the front of the module. This port is used for
downloading the Non-vital Configuration from the GCSS and uploading
the Non-vital Configuration and Vital PROM Data to the ICS.
A.12.2.4 Serial Power Supply
The NVC/DM derives operational power for its communication ports

from a separate isolated power supply. The ports are disabled when this
power is not present.
A.12.3 Function
The main functions of the NVC/DM are:
• Evaluate non-vital logic;
• Exchange configured logic states with control centres, control
computers, external WSA/S2 field stations and the vital processor
(HVLM128 or VLM5);
• Log all changes to vital and non-vital logic states, all detected
WESTRACE system faults and other significant operational
occurrences (known as ‘operations’);
The NVC/DM can store up to 250,000 change of state events, 200
system faults and 100 operations in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM);
The logging capacity is 3 days for a small interlocking without an
external diagnostic system connected, or 6 hours for a large
interlocking without an external diagnostic system connected;
The NVC/DM has its own Real Time Clock for time and date
stamping of logged events, WESTRACE system faults and operations.

The time and date can be set from a control centre or through a
diagnostic port;
• Allow an external diagnostic system such as MoviolaW to extract
logged data and view current logic states;
• Allow an external system to upload the Non-vital Configuration and
Vital PROM Data.
Timestamp Synchronisation
Where a system consists of more than one WESTRACE installation, it is

important that the time of day in each installation is the same so that
their events can be correlated by time.
A typical real time clock will drift by 2 seconds a day, so two installations
may drift apart by 4 seconds a day (24 minutes over 12 months).
To ensure time synchronisation of a system consisting of more than one

WESTRACE installation, an external diagnostic system should be used
to synchronise the installation’s clocks by sending regular ‘set time’
commands.
A.12.4 Operation
The NVC/DM has four operating modes:
Mode Description Indications
Normal Normal operation. Watchdog LED flashes green.
Maintenance Used for downloading a new Watchdog LED flashes red.

Non-vital Configuration.
Production Used for downloading new Watchdog LED off. Display

firmware. shows Prd.
Shutdown NVC/DM has shutdown Watchdog LED not flashing.

because of a fatal internal Display shows a 3-digit fault
fault. code.
Table A44: Operating Modes—NVC/DM
Unless otherwise specified, the functionality described here relates to

Normal mode only.
A.12.4.1 Selecting Maintenance Mode
Maintenance mode is manually selected by either:

a) connecting a special ‘Maintenance’ cable to the Production Port and
then restarting the NVC/DM. See section A.12.7.4 for details;
b) setting one of the on-board switches and then restarting the NVC/
DM. See figure A.38, and “S2 Switch Bank” on page A-130.
A.12.4.2 Selecting Production Mode
Production mode is selected either:

• automatically, if the NVC/DM firmware is detected as being invalid,
or;
• manually, by setting one of the on-board jumpers and then restarting
the NVC/DM. See “PROD Jumper” (page A-129).
A.12.5.1 Hardware Settings
Figure A.38 illustrates the switch banks and jumpers used to configure
the NVC/DM. Number 1 switch or jumper pin is indicated by a small
triangle symbol in each case.
PROD
2
1
3
2
1
PSWD
3
1 8 1 8 2
OFF OFF 1
CEDVER S2
Non-vital Maintenance Production Password

Configura- switch bank (S2) jumper jumper
tion Version (PROD) (PSWD)
switch bank
(CEDVER)
Figure A.38: Configuration Switches and Jumpers—NVC/DM
Jumpers
PROD Jumper
Production mode is entered by shorting pins 1 & 2 of the PROD jumper

and then restarting the NVC/DM.

PSWD Jumper
The Diagnostic Mode passwords can be changed during operation of the

NVC/DM. They can be reset to the values stored in the Non-vital Config-
uration by shorting pins 1 & 2 of the PSWD jumper and then restarting
the NVC/DM.
Note: Store the PROD and PSWD jumpers on pins 2 and 3 when the modes
are not set.
Switches
CEDVER Switch Bank
The NVC/DM uses the version number set by the CEDVER switch bank
to ensure the correct Non-vital Configuration is stored in PROM. Switch
1 is the least significant bit and switch ON is zero.
S2 Switch Bank
This switch bank is used for two purposes:

• putting the NVC/DM into Maintenance mode;
• setting the data transfer rate for the Production Port.
Set the switches according to table A45 and restart the NVC/DM to acti-
vate the desired configuration.
Switch Setting
1 OFF for Normal mode

ON to select Maintenance Mode
2 OFF for 9600 bits per second

ON for 115200 bits per second
3–8 Not used. Normally left in the OFF

position.
Table A45: Switch Bank S2—Valid Settings—NVC/DM
The NVC/DM will stay in Maintenance mode until switch 1 is returned

to OFF and the system is rebooted.
A.12.5.2 Non-vital Configuration
The majority of the NVC/DM configuration is done using the GCSS and
is stored in the Non-vital Configuration.
The Non-vital Configuration includes:

• default passwords;
• initial states of non-vital logic states;
• non-vital application logic and timer details;
• Configuration details for each port, such as:

• protocol;
• basic serial parameters (eg data transfer rate, handshaking);
• clock signal usage (input, output or reconstructed from data);
• protocol parameters (eg data word length, addresses, inter-scan
delay);
• default dial-out telephone numbers (diagnostic ports only);
• I/O bit mappings (telemetry ports only).
A.12.5.3 Replacing the NVC/DM
A replacement NVC/DM must be configured to suit the particular loca-

tion. Usually this means the replacement must be configured to exactly
match the NVC/DM being replaced.
Before beginning, you must:

b) Power down the WESTRACE installation.
Remove the NVC/DM from the WESTRACE Housing

a) Remove the front panel of the WESTRACE housing;
b) Observe the anti-static procedures;
c) Remove the NVC/DM from the housing using the WESTRACE card
extraction tool. See figure A.39.
Pin of extraction tool

engages hole in card
Heel of extraction tool

bears on frame
Figure A.39: Removing a Card From the WESTRACE Housing
Fit Daughter Boards
There is one daughter board for each active serial port (except the
Production port). The replacement NVC/DM must use daughter boards

of identical type and in the same locations as the removed NVC/DM. This
is defined in the local documentation.
Reverse side of
daughter board
Figure A.40: CIMFIM With Four Daughter Boards—NVC/DM
There are two types of daughter board:

• SDB232 for RS232-C communications;
• SDB485 for RS485 communications.
Working daughter boards may be swapped from the removed NVC/DM

to the replacement NVC/DM if required.
a) Separate the CIMFIM from the LEC; see figure A.41;
b) Remove and insert daughter boards as required;
Each daughter board is attached to the CIMFIM by two connectors;
Ensure that all plug pins properly mate with the sockets. It is
possible to connect the daughter boards with only half the pins
actually plugged into the socket;
c) Re-connect the CIMFIM to the LEC.
Note: Ensure that the PROD and PSWD jumpers on the LEC board are
absent or stored on pins 2 and 3.
Remove screws from

stand-offs (4)
Disengage connector (1)
Figure A.41: Separating the LEC and CIMFIM—NVC/DM
Install the Non-vital Configuration
There are five parts to this task:

a) Ensuring you have the right equipment;
b) Setting the Non-vital Configuration version switches on the NVC/
DM LEC;
c) Switching the NVC/DM to Maintenance Mode;
d) Installing the NVC/DM into the housing;
e) Down loading the new Non-vital Configuration to the NVC/DM.
WESTRACE must not be controlling an interlocking while

downloading a Non-vital Configuration.
Equipment Required
• A personal computer (PC) loaded with:s
• the Graphical Configuration Subsystem (GCSS version 6 or
later);
• the correct Non-vital Configuration for the NVC/DM;
• the Installation Check System (ICS).
• A ‘standard’ cable as described in figure A.52 to connect the serial
port on the PC to the Production port on the NVC/DM LEC module.
Alternatively, a ‘maintenance’ cable as described in figure A.52 may
be used. The ‘maintenance’ cable configuration causes the NVC/DM
to automatically start in ‘Maintenance’ mode. See “Setting the
Maintenance Mode” on page A-134.
• A copy of the WESTRACE Graphical Configuration Subsystem
Manual.
Setting Non-vital Configuration version switches
The NVC/DM requires that the Non-vital Configuration version must be

that set by the CEDVER switches. This protects against loading an incor-
rect version. See figure A.42.

Set the switches on the LEC to define the Non-vital Configuration

version specified on the GCSS printout for the Non-vital Configuration.
Switch 1 is the least significant bit. Switch ON is zero.
For example, to set Non-vital Configuration version 1, you set switch 1

OFF and switches 2-8 ON. This is illustrated by figure A.42. To set Non-
vital Configuration version 5, switches 1 and 3 are OFF, all others are
ON.
Switches 2-8 ON (zero)
Switch 1 OFF (1)
Figure A.42: Non-vital Configuration—Setting Version 1—NVC/

DM
Setting the Maintenance Mode
Select ‘Maintenance mode’ either by connecting a Maintenance Cable to

the Product Port, or by setting switches 1 and 2 of switch bank S2 to ON.
See section A.12.4.1 for details.
Refitting the NVC/DM
Refit the NVC/DM into the housing. Insertion is the reverse of removal
described in “Remove the NVC/DM from the WESTRACE Housing”
(page A-131) with the exception of not replacing the front panel.
Downloading the Non-vital Configuration

a) Connect the cable of choice between the Production Port and the PC;
see figure A.43;
b) Power up WESTRACE;
Ensure that the NVC/DM has entered Maintenance mode (the
watchdog LED should be flashing red);
c) Download the Non-vital Configuration according to the instructions
in the WESTRACE Graphical Configuration Subsystem Manual.
Figure A.43: Production Port—Connecting—NVC/DM
Verify the Data
The Non-vital Configuration must be verified before the system is

returned to service.
a) Ensure the NVC/DM is in maintenance mode and the PC is
connected to the NVC/DM Production Port;
b) Run ICS according to the instructions in the WESTRACE
Installation Check System Manual;
c) Complete procedural checking and sign off as per the WESTRACE
Installation Check System Manual.
Restore the System
When the Maintenance Cable was used to set Maintenance Mode

b) Remove the cable from the Production Port;
c) Refit the front panel to the housing(s);
d) Power up WESTRACE;
e) Allow WESTRACE to run for several minutes; ensure that no fault
f) Advise the Signaller of completion.
When Switch Bank S2 was used to set Maintenance Mode

b) Remove the NVC/DM from the housing;
c) Set switch 1 of switch S2 to OFF (Maintenance Mode OFF). See figure
A.38;
d) Refit the NVC/DM into the housing. Replacement of the NVC/DM is
the reverse of the procedure described in “Remove the NVC/DM
from the WESTRACE Housing” on page A-131;
e) Refit the front panel to the housing(s);

f) Power up WESTRACE;
g) Allow WESTRACE to run for several minutes; ensure that no fault
h) Advise the Signaller of completion.
A lithium battery is used to maintain logged data in non-volatile memory

and the real-time clock when the NVC/DM is powered down. The battery
has a very long life and in normal circumstances it is unlikely to require
replacement. The NVC/DM is usually shipped with the battery
connected.
To replace the battery:

a) Have a replacement battery of the same type as the original plus
cable ties readily at hand. See figure A.44;
b) Snip the cable ties holding the old battery to the printed circuit
board;
c) Remove the battery lead from the pins;
d) Connect the replacement battery to the pins. You have a short period
to do this before data is lost;
e) Fix the replacement battery to the circuit board using the new cable
ties;
f) Snip off the excess length of cable ties.
Figure A.44: Lithium Battery—NVC/DM
A.12.6 Indications
The ‘user interface’ of the NVC/DM comprises LEDs and a four digit
alphanumeric display.
Internal Fault LED

2{
3{
D1 D2 D3 D4
Tx & Rx LEDs
4{ Alphanumeric Fault display
for serial ports
2–7 5{
6{
7{ Watchdog LED
Not used {
Power indicator Production port
Communications
Interface Module
Filter & Interface Module Logic Evaluation Card (LEC)
(CIMFIM)
Figure A.45: User Interface—NVC/DM
A.12.6.1 Logic Evaluation Card LEDs
The LEC has two front panel LEDs:

• Internal fault LED (red)—illuminated whenever there is a non-fatal
internal NVC/DM fault. These faults require attention, but are not
serious enough to cause the NVC/DM to shutdown;
• Watch dog LED (normally green)—flashes at a regular interval if all
is well with the NVC/DM. During the first minute or so of operation,
the LED may flash at a faster than normal rate. It should then flash at
the same rate as the green watchdog LED on the VLM.
This LED flashes red when the NVC/DM is in Maintenance mode.
A.12.6.2 Communications Interface Module LEDs
The CIMFIM has 13 front panel LEDs:

• Transmit LED (yellow)—for each of the 6 serial ports. Flashes when
data is transmitted;
• Receive LED (green)—for each of the 6 serial ports. Flashes when data
is received;
• Power Indicator LED (green)—indicates the +24 V comms power
supply is present.
See section A.12.6.5 for further information about these indicators.

A.12.6.3 Alphanumeric Display
The alphanumeric display can only show one fault at any time. However,
all fault codes which occur are logged by the NVC/DM and can be exam-
ined using external diagnostic equipment.
Shutdown Mode
The alphanumeric display will show the applicable fault code if the
NVC/DM shuts down because of a fatal internal fault. See table A52.
Normal Mode
Within the first 12 seconds of the NVC/DM operating in this mode, the
alphanumeric display will show start-up information (see section
A.12.6.4) and then it will be blank unless a fault is detected.
During operation, a ‘non-fatal’ fault may occur which will cause the
NVC/DM to display a fault code but continue to operate. In the event of
multiple faults being present simultaneously, the NVC/DM will display
the code for the first of the following that applies:
a) ‘TIME’ if the NVC/DM real time clock has not been set;
b) a non-fatal NVC/DM internal fault code, see table A53;
c) a port fault code (lowest numbered port take precedence), see table
A48;
d) an S2 address fault code (lowest numbered S2 address takes
precedence), see section A.12.6.7.2);
e) ‘FLT ’ where one or more WESTRACE system faults have not been
uploaded by the external diagnostic equipment;
f) ‘BAT ’ if the NVC/DM battery voltage is low.
Maintenance Mode
The alphanumeric display will show the following when the NVC/DM is
in this mode:
• blank display when ready to download a new Non-vital
Configuration;
• progress messages during and after a Non-vital Configuration
download.
Production Mode
The alphanumeric display will show the following when the NVC/DM is
in this mode:
• ‘Prd ’ when ready to download new firmware;
• progress messages during and after a firmware download.
A.12.6.4 Start Up
The alphanumeric display shows a sequence of information (in hexadec-

imal) during start-up:
Time after Information Details

Start-up
0–4 secs Ignore.
4–6 secs. Lamp test All segments/dots illuminate to verify they

are functional.
6–9 secs. Backplane address Display shows ‘A hh’ where ‘hh’ is the
backplane address of the slot holding the
Logic Evaluation Card (LEC).
9–12 secs. Software version Display shows ‘V hh’ where ‘hh’ is the
version number of the NVC/DM software.
Table A46: Start-up Display Sequence—NVC/DM
A.12.6.5 Operation
A correctly operating NVC/DM will show the following:
Indicator Condition
Internal Fault LED Off
Alphanumeric display Blank
Watchdog LED Regularly flashing green
Serial Rx LED(s) Flashes green when the NVC/DM is receiving

messages though the associated serial port.
message is addressed to the NVC/DM.
Serial Tx LED(s) Flashes yellow after the NVC/DM has transmitted a

message through the associated serial port.
Power Indicator Steady green
Table A47: Normal Operation Indicators—NVC/DM
Note: The watchdog LED flashes red when the NVC/DM is in Maintenance
mode.
The Rx and Tx LEDs may appear to be ON rather than flashing for
high data rates.
A.12.6.6 Fault Detection
A.12.6.6.1 WESTRACE Module Faults
During the first 16 seconds after power up, all WESTRACE modules
display in sequence via their diagnostic LEDs:

• software version;
• the value 00 (all LEDs off) to indicate ‘no fault’.
During operation, each module will generate a non-zero fault code if a

fault is detected.
The NVC/DM polls each module in turn to read this information, and
will record any changes. These changes are stored in the order that they
are read, which may not necessarily be the order in which they occurred.
A.12.6.6.2 NVC/DM Faults
In the event of an internal NVC/DM fault, the NVC/DM will either:

• display a code on the alphanumeric display, log a fault, and continue
operating. This action is taken for ‘non-fatal’ faults (such as a comms
port failure, low battery, or date/time not set), which do not
compromise safe operation of the NVC/DM;
• force a reset of the NVC/DM hardware. This action is taken if the
NVC/DM software or hardware appears to be malfunctioning. A fault
will be logged when the system restarts.
In many cases, the restart will clear the fault and the NVC/DM will
resume normal operation.
When an internal fault is the cause of an NVC/DM restart:

a) the NVC/DM will temporarily lose communications with the VLM;
b) the VLM will display a fault code (typically 34h) because of the
communications loss but the VLM will keep running because the
NVC/DM is a non-vital module.
This VLM fault code will persist even after communications between the
VLM and NVC/DM are returned to normal. The only way to clear the
fault code is to restart the WESTRACE system.
If a second fault occurs within the first minute of operation after an

NVC/DM restart:
a) the NVC/DM will conclude that the fault is permanent;
b) the NVC/DM will shutdown and display a fault code on the
alphanumeric display.
At this point, all NVC/DM communications ports are disabled and will
stay that way until WESTRACE is restarted.
The alphanumeric display comprises four digits; D1, D2, D3 and D4

reading from top to bottom on the display. See figure A.45. Figures A.46
to A.49 show the alphanumeric display being read left to right where the
left position corresponds with the top position in figure A.45.
D1 D2 D3 D4
Figure A.46: Four Digit Alphanumeric Display—NVC/DM
The hexadecimal numbers shown by this display identify the following:

• the class of fault (internal NVC/DM fault, port fault, or an S2 address
fault);
• the port number or S2 address as appropriate;
• a code identifying the fault.
Digit D1 is dedicated to identifying a port. The other three (D2–D4) are

shared between identifying an S2 address and providing a fault code.
The tables below show a value for each digit but in some instances the
value can vary. In those cases, the value of the digit is represented by a
mnemonic as follows:
p port number (hex)

mm S2 address (hex)
f fault code (hex)
A.12.6.7.1 Port faults
Digit D1 identifies the faulty port. Digits D2 and D3 are set to zero and
digit D4 is the fault code.
p 0 0 f
Port number (2-7 hex) Fault code (0,1 hex)
Figure A.47: Alphanumeric Display—Port Fault—NVC/DM
For example, 8001 indicates a fault code 1 on port 8. The table below
shows valid port fault codes.


p001 Port time out Serial Rx LED flashing:
Timeout (10s) when waiting for an • check the serial port configuration in
incoming message (slave port). Non-vital Configuration;
Failure to get a response (within 10s) from • replace the NVC/DM if the configuration
The range any external slave (master port). is correct.
for p is 2 to
Serial Rx LED off:
7.
• check the comms link cabling and con-
nections;
• replace the protection module, the relat-
ed daughter board or the NVC/DM.
8001 VLM port time-out. It is normal for this code to be displayed if

the VLM shuts down for any reason.
Try the following if this code is on display
and the VLM is still running:
a. Restart WESTRACE.
b. Check to ensure the VLM and NVC/DM
CEDs are consistent with respect to
transfer states passed between them.
Normally GCSS ensures that this is the
case.
c. Check to ensure that only one NVC/DM
and no DM is installed.
d. Replace the NVC/DM.
Table A48: Fault Codes—Port Codes in General—NVC/DM
Other Port Codes
This code is not displayed. It is reported in the fault log only.
CODE(H) DESCRIPTION
p000 The port p has recovered and is now operational.
Table A49: Fault Codes—Port Codes—Other—NVC/DM
A.12.6.7.2 Telemetry Address Faults
NVC/DM telemetry ports can appear as a range of S2 addresses.
The NVC/DM reports on faults for connected S2 addresses. The fault

code is interpreted from the alphanumeric display as described here.
An address fault indicates:

• slave port— no messages for this particular address have been
received from the S2 office;
• office port— no response has been received from the S2 field station
at this particular address.
These should not be confused with port faults, which indicate no

messages at all are being received at a particular port.
Digit D1 identifies the port to which the S2 address is connected. Digits

D2 and D3 identify the S2 address, and digit D4 is the fault code.
p m m f
}
Port number (2-7 hex) Fault code (8,9 hex)
S2 address (00-3F hex)
Figure A.48: Alphanumeric Display—S2 Address Fault—NVC/

DM
For example, 21B9 indicates a fault code 9 on the S2 address 1B (33 octal)
connected to telemetry port 2.
The table below shows valid S2 address fault codes.
pmm9 Communication to an S2 address has timed Slave port

out. Check that the telemetry master is
Slave port—timeout when waiting for a sending data to this address. (Use S2 test
valid message addressed to address mm link or similar.)
(hex) on port p (hex).
Check the addresses stored in the Non-
Master port—timeout waiting for a valid
vital Configuration to see if they match
response from the S2 field address mm (hex)
the addresses sent by the office.
on port p (hex).
Master port
Check that the slave at this address is
functioning correctly. (Use S2 test link or
similar.)
Check that the addresses stored in the
Non-vital Configuration match those of
the field stations.
Table A50: Fault Codes—S2 Address—NVC/DM
Other Telemetry codes
This code is not displayed. It is reported in the fault log only.
CODE(H) FAULT DESCRIPTION
pmm8 S2 address mm (hex) on port p (hex) has recovered from a fault and is now
operational.
Table A51: Fault Codes—Telemetry—Other—NVC/DM
A.12.6.7.3 Internal faults
Three digits (D2–D4) show the fault code (000–FFF) as defined by the
tables below. Digit D1 is always blank.
f f f
}
Fault code (000-FFF hex)
Figure A.49: Alphanumeric Display—Internal Fault—NVC/DM

The first action should be to restart WESTRACE. Next, find the displayed
fault code in the tables below and take the recommended action. All of
these fault codes, plus any read from the fault latches of other
WESTRACE modules are logged to the NVC/DM fault buffer in the order
they are detected by the NVC/DM.
Fatal NVC/DM Fault Codes
These faults cause the NVC/DM to restart. If the fault persists, the NVC/
DM will shut down.
003 Application Checksum Error Replace NVC/DM
004 Stack Guard Band Error "
005 RAM Error "
009 Stack Error "
080 Non-vital Configuration checksum error Download new Non-vital Configuration
084 Non-vital Configuration version number Confirm that the version switches are
error correctly set.
If the switches are correct, download new
Non-vital Configuration.
100 Build error Download new Non-vital Configuration
101 Out of memory Replace NVC/DM
102 Operating system error "
103 Internal error "
104 Task suspended "
105 NVRAM error "
107 Comms buffer error "
108 Non-vital Configuration format version Download new Non-vital Configuration

error
109 Watchdog restart Replace NVC/DM
10A No VLM Non-vital Configuration copy Restart WESTRACE
10B Wrong VLM Non-vital Configuration copy "
10C VLM interface versions mismatch Check the NVC/DM and VLM Non-vital
Configuration versions.
10D VLM address mismatch Check the NVC/DM Non-vital

Configuration and WESTRACE installation
details
10E IMB data error Replace NVC/DM. Could also be a faulty

backplane or VLM.
10F Wrong IMB slot Move NVC/DM to the correct backplane

slot
111 Timing error Replace NVC/DM
Table A52: Fault Codes—Fatal—NVC/DM
Non-fatal NVC/DM Fault Codes
CODE FAULT DESCRIPTION ACTION
BAT Low battery Replace battery
FLT There are faults in the fault buffer that have Request faults from the fault buffer through
not yet been requested by an external MovioaW.
diagnostic system.
F11 Main cycle not synchronized Check the NVC/DM and VLM CEDs.
(NVC/DM cannot keep up with VLM.)
F21 Software version number lost Replace NVC/DM
F22 Module information error "
F23 Fault bus error "
F24 Fault detection NVRAM error "
TIME Time has not been set Set correct time through MoviolaW, CTC or
Getlog. It is possible to set the time via the
S2 protocols.
DIAG There are faults stored in the Fault Buffer. Connect or check and restart an external
diagnostic system and request the fault
codes from the Fault Buffer.
Table A53: Fault Codes—Non-fatal—NVC/DM
Other NVC/DM Codes
The following codes are not displayed. They are reported in the fault log
only.
CODE(H) FAULT DESCRIPTION
F00 Recovered from low battery condition.
F01 Low battery (corresponds to ‘BAT ’ display).
F10 Recovered from VLM out-of-sync error.
F30 Time has been set, i.e. an invalid time/date error has been corrected.,
F31 Date/time not set (corresponds to ‘TIME’ display).
Table A54: Fault Codes—Other—NVC/DM

Diagnostic or telemetry connection
Telemetry connection only
Not used
Serial (B24) Power Connector
Figure A.50: External Connectors—CIMPM Card—NVC/DM
A.12.7.1 Serial Power Connector
Connection to the serial power interface is via a Klippon removable

screw terminal plug with the following connections:
Pin Number Signal
1 +24V
2 Common (0V)
3 Not used
Table A55: Serial Power Pinout—NVC/DM
A.12.7.2 Diagnostic and Telemetry Serial Connectors
Each serial interface is a male DB9 connector configured as either RS232

or RS 485. Figure A.50 shows all 7 DB9 connectors. Connector 1 is not used
at present.
RS232-C Connection
1 DCD External equipment
2 RxD External equipment
3 TxD NVC/DM
Table A56: DB9 Pinout—RS232 Connection—NVC/DM
4 DTR NVC/DM
5 ISOGND (Common)
6 CLKOUT NVC/DM
7 RTS NVC/DM
8 CTS External equipment
9 CLKIN External equipment
Table A56: DB9 Pinout—RS232 Connection—NVC/DM (Continued)
RS485 Connection
1 RxD– External equipment
2 RxD+ External equipment
3 TxD+ NVC/DM
4 TxD– NVC/DM
5 ISOGND (Common)
6 CLKOUT+ NVC/DM
7 CLKOUT– NVC/DM
8 CLKIN– External equipment
9 CLKIN+ External equipment
Table A57: DB9 Pinout—RS485 Connection—NVC/DM
This port is a male DB9 connector on the front edge of the card (see figure
A.51). Signal levels are to RS232-C standard and the connector pinout is
shown in table A58. This port is only enabled when the NVC/DM is in
Maintenance mode.

Figure A.51: Production Port—NVC/DM
Pin Number Signal Comment
1 N/C
2 RxD input
3 TxD output
4 N/C
5 Common
6 N/C
7 RTS output (Always active)
8 MAINT input (Selects maintenance mode)
9 SPEED input (Selects maintenance mode data

transfer rate)
Table A58: DB9 Pinout—Production Port—NVC/DM
A cable with any of the configurations in figure A.52 will allow a personal
computer to connect to the:
• production port (a DB9 connector on the front edge of the LEC);
• diagnostic port (a DB9 connector at the rear of the housing).
The interconnection of pins 7, 8 and 9 on the Maintenance cable has no

effect when the cable is connected to a Diagnostic port. When the cable is
plugged into the Production port, the interconnection makes the NVC/
DM switch to its Maintenance mode of operation and selects the 115 kbps
data transfer rate.
Production or Diagnostic Port Personal Computer

Pin Pin
2 3
3 2
5 5
Standard
Cable Production or Diagnostic Port Personal Computer
Pin Pin
2 2
3 3
{
5 7
Production Port
DB9 Female
Pin
}
Maintenance 2 Connections
Cable 3 as above
5
Pins 7, 8 & 9
interconnected
at this end
{ 7
8
9
Figure A.52: Cable Configuration Details—NVC/DM
A.12.7.5 Connecting a Diagnostic System
Most WESTRACE installations will have a permanently connected Movi-

olaW. Some installations allow remote access via Hayes compatible
modem.
Types of Diagnostic System
Two diagnostic systems are available:

• MoviolaW—a Microsoft Windows based user friendly utility;
• Real time graphical display of the state of the interlocking;
• Records for later playback, events (logic state changes) which
occur after MoviolaW commences running;
• Extraction of historical fault information from an NVC/DM
(although not historical event or operation information);
displaying telemetry statistics;
• GETLOG—a command line driven utility;
• Extraction of historical and real time event, fault and operation
information which is displayed and stored in text form;
displaying telemetry statistics;
• More straight forward to install and configure than MoviolaW;
• Can support larger systems than can MoviolaW.

Requirements
You will need:

• A personal computer (PC) loaded with MoviolaW or GETLOG;
• The MoviolaW display files for the particular installation;
For GETLOG, it is useful to have the Non-vital Configuration image
(.img) files for the installation;
• The passwords for accessing the particular NVC/DM;
For MoviolaW, the passwords for a particular NVC/DM are stored in
the MoviolaW .ini file, and are configured using the MoviolaW
NVC/DM driver software;
For GETLOG, the password must be specified on the command line;
• A cable to connect the serial port(s) on the PC and the Diagnostic
port. See figure A.52;
• The user manual for the chosen diagnostic system.
Procedure
a) Connect the PC to a configured diagnostic port at the rear of the
housing. See figure A.50 and refer to the local documentation;
b) Start up the chosen diagnostic system;
c) Follow the guidelines for fault finding.
Non-vital Communications Module (NVC)
A.13 Non-vital Communications Module (NVC)
A.13.1 Description
The NVC module is a serial data link interface for communication with
a local, or remote non-vital control system.
The module communicates synchronous serial data using the

WESTRONIC S2 communication protocol. It is normally used to receive
controls and return indications to a remote control centre, typically a
CTC system. It would either be interfaced to a digital circuit, or to an
analogue line using an appropriate modem. It may also be used to inter-
face to a local panel. The NVC operates as a slave device on a master/
slave communication regime. It is set with a unique slave address and
will only act on data that matches this setting. It will then respond with
indication status as defined in the application logic.
The S2 protocol allows S2 fields and WESTRACE NVC modules to

communicate on a single communication bearer. NVC modules with tri-
state communications output to the bearer using tri-state circuits, and
are enabled only when required to place signals on the bearer.
Appropriate bearer interface arrangements must be used where multiple

systems are connected to a single bearer. Appropriate tri-state NVC
modules must be used.
A.13.2 Particulars
The NVC is comprised of a single printed circuit board. The circuit board
has configuration DIP switches which are used to select the NVC's slave
address, data transfer rate, data word length and other configuration
parameters.
A.13.3 Function
The NVC derives power for its communication circuits from an external
24 Vdc supply. This power supply may be provided by either the OPC (as
part of the VLM) or by another source, depending upon the application.
Removal of this voltage positively prevents the NVC from transmitting
and receiving data.
The NVC is processor based and it interfaces with the VLM. It performs
the self-testing and housekeeping functions for the module.
Clock Reconstruction
NVC modules with clock reconstruction should be used when there is no

external clock signal (RxC) available. NVC modules capable of clock
reconstruction can internally generate the clock signal from received
data. The clock signal may be used for communication without using a
modem.

Supplying an external clock signal, if available, to an NVC module (with-

out clock reconstruction) will normally provide superior performance.
Also see section A.13.4.7.
Configuration of the NVC is achieved by the setting of the two switch
banks shown below. Refer to the WESTRACE NVC module configuration
in the system schematics for the particular WESTRACE installation.
Figure A.53: Configuration Switches—NVC
A.13.4.1 Slave Address
The module’s S2 address is configured by SW1/1 to SW1/6 (WAD0–

WAD5) where WAD5 is the most significant bit of the 6 bit address, eg for
an address of 21 octal the switches are set as follows:
Where: On = 0
Off = 1
Figure A.54: Slave Address—Setting—NVC
The example shown above from WAD5–WAD0 gives 010 001 (21 octal, or
17 decimal).
A.13.4.2 System Bit
The system bit switch is used to determine in which telemetry system the
NVC is operating. This facility is configured by SW1/7 (System). The
system bit is a logical 1 when this switch is On.
A.13.4.3 Telfail
The Telfail switch is used to determine whether a telemetry failure indi-

cation will be passed from the NVC to the VLM for processing by the
Application Data. This facility is configured by SW1/8 (Telfail). Telfail
processing is required when this switch is On.
Note: Do not use control bit 0 (zero) for an application when the Telfail
switch is set to On. The NVC automatically sets this bit in response to
a failure to transmit or receive data.
The NVC will output a frame if not correctly addressed within a 30

second period.
A.13.4.4 Data Transfer Rate
The data transfer rate is configured by SW2/1 to SW2/3. The switches

enable selection of different data transfer rates depending upon the
telemetry system configuration. The switches are set as follows:
Data Transfer Rate BRD0 BRD1 BRD2

(bits per second) SW2/1 SW2/2 SW2/3
600 On On On
1200 Off Off Off
2400 On Off Off
4800 Off On Off
Table A59: Data Transfer Rate—Setting—NVC
All other configurations are illegal.
NVC232 and NVC422 modules which offer clock reconstruction are fitted
with daughter boards which must also be configured for data transfer
rate.
The daughter board links are positioned as shown by figure A.55. The
data transfer rate selection is made according to the illustration.
Figure A.55: Clock Reconstruction Daughter Board—NVC

A.13.4.5 Data Word Length
The data word length is configured by SW2/4 to SW2/5 (DWL0–DWL1).

These switches enable selection of different data word lengths depending
upon the telemetry system configuration.
The switches can be set as follows:
Data Word DWL0 DWL1

SW2/4 SW2/5
64 Off Off
32 On Off
48 Off On
128 On On
Table A60: Data Word Length—Setting—NVC
S2 systems are typically set to 64 bit data word length.
A.13.4.6 Modem
The modem switch is used to determine whether modem handshaking is

required. This facility is configured by SW2/6 (modem). Modem hand-
shaking is required when this switch is On.
A.13.4.7 Transmit Data Clock
The source of the transmit clock can be selected by setting the Ext1
switch on SW2 thus:
Switch Position 7 = OFF Internal clock—transmit data clock is inter-

nally generated without reference to
received signals. Typically when NVC is
connected to a modem.
Switch Position 7 = ON External clock—used when interfacing to

carrier communication systems that require
synchronised clocks for both transmitted
and received data.
The NVC takes an external receive data

clock and generates both the transmit data
clock and the transmit data from it.
Applies to:
• NVC 422 (modem) module (3650 1139 10)
Issue 1.3 and later;
• NVC 422 (no modem) module
(3650 1139 11) Issue 2.0 and later.
A.13.4.8 Unused
Ext2 switch on SW2 is not used by the NVC and should be set Off.
A.13.5 Indications
A.13.5.1 Start Up
Diagnostic LEDs display the module type code, followed shortly by a

There are four additional LEDs on the NVC. They are used to indicate
correct operation of the telemetry. The telemetry is connected to serial
channel A; serial channel B is not used. There is one LED for transmit
and one for receive. These LEDs are labelled on the PCB as TxDAI and
RxDAI respectively.
A.13.5.2 Operation
When the NVC is receiving valid SDLC telemetry messages, the RxDAI
will flash for 20 to 30 milliseconds. This LED will flash irrespective of
whether the telemetry message is addressed to the NVC.
The NVC will transmit an indication message when it receives a valid

SDLC telemetry message with an address that matches the address set by
the switches WAD0–WAD5.
After the message is sent, the NVC flashes the TxDAI LED for 20 to 30
milliseconds.

02 Module Type Error Replace NVC
05 RAM Error "
09 Stack Error "
0D Run Time Error D Replace NVC
Table A61: Fault Codes—NVC


32 ST IMB Too Few IMB Calls Replace NVC
80 Illegal data transfer Rate Configuration Check data transfer rate switches
Table A61: Fault Codes—NVC (Continued)
A.13.6.1 RS232-C Connections
External Connections to the NVC232 are made via the SIO232PFM.
power.
Figure A.56: External Connections—SIO232 PFM—NVC
Pin Function
1 Chassis Ground
17 Receive Clock (RxC)
24 Transmit Clock (TxC)
Table A62: DB25 Pinout—SIO232 PFM—NVC

A.13.6.2 RS422 Connections

External Connections to the NVC422 are made via the SIO422PFM.
The SIO422 PFM External Connectors are a 14 way ribbon header for RS422
interface, and a 2 Way plug and socket Klippon type BLA/SLA for power.
Figure A.57: External Connections—SIO422 PFM—NVC
Figure A.58 and table A63 show the RS422 pin numbering.
Figure A.58: RS422 Connector Pin Numbering—SIO422 PFM—

NVC
Pin Function
1 0 Volts (O V)
2 Received Clock + (RxC +)
3 Received Clock - (RxC -)
4 Transmit Clock + (TxC +)
5 Transmit Clock - (TxC -)
7 Not Used
8 Transmit Data + (TxD+)
9 Transmit Data - (TxD-)
10 Receive Data + (RxD+)
11 Receive Data - (RxD-)
14 0 Volts (O V)
Table A63: 14-Way Ribbon Header Pinout—SIO422 PFM—NVC
Diagnostic Module (DM)
A.14 Diagnostic Module (DM)
A.14.1 Description
The is DM used with older VLM modules. It comprises a single printed
circuit board and provides two user interfaces, the Technician Interface,
and the Event Recorder Interface.
A.14.2 Particulars
Both interfaces are RS232 compatible, and may connect to a dumb termi-
nal. The Event Recorder interface permits the recording of all change of
state information and may optionally be connected to a serial storage
device or printer. The Technician Interface permits the user to interro-
gate the VLM’s logic states, and display system data pertaining to the
particular installation.
Only one DM module can be installed in a system. Its position is allocated

by the GCSS or CSS to slot 15 in housing 1.
A.14.3 Function
The DM permits the user to interrogate the WESTRACE system via the
Technician Interface. The operation of the Technician Interface is defined
in Appendix B. The Event Recorder Interface permits all change of state
information relating to the WESTRACE installation to be recorded.
The DM is capable of storing up to 800 prior change of state events, and

the most recent module faults in battery-backed non-volatile RAM. The
DM has its own Real Time Clock for time and date stamping of events and
faults. The time and date are set via the Technician Interface.
The DM does not require external power for communications.
The DM is processor based and it interfaces with the VLM. It performs

the self-testing and housekeeping functions for the module.
A.14.4 Operation
During the power up initialisation period following a system reset (and
provided no faults are detected), a WESTRACE module writes the follow-
ing data to its fault code latch:
• software version number;
• clear fault code values.
The DM polls each module in turn to read this information and it only
stores changes to the information. The DM stores the changes it sees
first, and since it polls each of the WESTRACE modules in turn, the
stored change may not be the first that occurred. In other words, changes
recorded in one cycle are in the order they were read, not necessarily the
order in which they occurred.

For full details of the configuration applicable to this installation, refer
to the folders in the Signalling Equipment Room.
Configure the module for the installation using the configuration switch
SW1.
Figure A.59: Layout—DM Module
Figure A.60: Configuration Switch—DM Module
The data transfer rates for the Event Recorder interface and the Techni-
cian Interface are configured by SW1/1 and SW1/2. These switches are
set as follows:
Technician Interface Data Transfer Rate
1200 SW1/1 Off

4800 SW1/1 On
Event Recorder Interface Data Transfer Rate
1200 SW1/2 Off

4800 SW1/2 On
All other switches are not used by the Diagnostic Module and must be set
to Off.
A battery is used to maintain data in non-volatile memory during normal

operation. The DM is shipped with the battery disconnected so the link
adjacent to the negative terminal of the battery (Link 17) must be fitted
before the System is powered up.
To prolong battery life, Link 17 should be removed when the unit is taken
out of service and put into storage, but only after any data has been
extracted.
A.14.6 Indications
A.14.6.1 Start Up

Ignore the Red LED that is near the green Watchdog LED.
A.14.6.2 Operation
Ignore the RED LED that is close to the green Watchdog LED.
None

External Connections to the DM are made via the SIO232PFM for the
Event Recorder and via the front of the DM module for the Technician
Interface.
A.14.7.1 Event Recorder Interface
RS232 interface, and a 2 way plug and socket Klippon type BLA/SLA (not
used).

Figure A.61: External Connections—SIO232 PFM—DM Module
Pin Function
Table A64: DB25 Pinout—Event Recorder Interface—SIO232

PFM—DM Module
Signal
The Signal is simplex asynchronous, data output only, and is selectable

from 1200 bits/s or 4800 bits/s. It comprises 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 parity
bit, even, and 1 stop bit.
A.14.7.2 Technician Interface
The Technician Interface is a DB25 connector on the front edge of the DM

module.
Pin Function
Table A65: DB25 Pinout—Technician Interface—DM Module
Signal
The Signal is Duplex Asynchronous, selectable from 1200 bits/s or 4800

bits/s and comprises 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 parity bit, even, and 1 stop
bit.
A cable with one of the following configurations will allow the connec-
tion of a personal computer to either the technician interface or the event
recorder interface.
Diagnostic Module Personal Computer

Pin Pin
2 3
3 2
7 7
Diagnostic Module Personal Computer

Pin Pin
2 2
3 3
7 5
Figure A.62: Interface Cable Configuration—DM Module

Diagnostic Module 128 (DM128)
A.15 Diagnostic Module 128 (DM128)
A.15.1 Description
The DM128 is used with the Hot Standby Vital Logic Module (HVLM128).
It comprises a single printed circuit board and provides two user inter-
faces, the Technician Interface, and the Event Recorder Interface.
A.15.2 Particulars
Both interfaces are RS232 compatible, and may connect to a dumb termi-
nal or a personal computer running MoviolaW. The Event Recorder
interface permits the recording of all change of state information and
may optionally be connected to a serial printer or other RS232 device.
The Technician Interface permits the user to interrogate the HVLM128’s
logic states, and display system data pertaining to the particular instal-
lation.
Only one DM128 module may be installed in a system. Its position is pre-
allocated to slot 15 in housing 1.
A.15.3 Function
The DM128 permits the user to interrogate the WESTRACE system via
the Technician Interface. The operation of the Technician Interface is
defined in Appendix B. The Event Recorder interface permits all change
of state information relating to the WESTRACE installation to be
recorded.
The DM128 is capable of storing up to 8030 previous change of state

events, and the most recent module faults in battery-backed non-volatile
RAM. The DM128 contains its own Real Time Clock for time and date
stamping of events and faults. The time and date are set via the Techni-
cian Interface.
The DM128 does not require external power for communications.
The DM128 is processor based and it interfaces with the HVLM128. It

performs self-testing and housekeeping functions for the module.
A.15.4 Operation
During the power up initialisation period following a system reset (and
provided no faults are detected), a WESTRACE module writes the follow-
ing data to its fault code latch:
• software version number;
• clear fault code values.
The DM128 polls each module in turn to read this information and it only
stores changes to the information. The DM128 stores the changes it sees
first, and since it polls each of the WESTRACE modules in turn, the
stored change may not be the first that occurred. In other words, changes
recorded in one cycle are in the order they were read, not necessarily the
order in which they occurred.
The DM128 is fitted with links or switches as depicted in figure A.63
(later modules have only soldered links preset to 4800 bps).
Configure the module for the installation using:

• links — if switch SW1 is not fitted;
• switches — if switch SW1 is fitted.
Figure A.63: Layout—DM 128
SW1 LINK (Resistor)
ON 14 In
1
Equivalent
ON 15 In
2
connections
OFF and 16 Not in
3
settings
OFF 17 Not in
4
OFF ON
Figure A.64: Links or SW1 Switches—Default Settings—DM128
The SW1 switches 1, 2, 3, and 4 are connected in parallel with the links
LK14, LK15, LK16 and LK17, respectively. If a module is fitted with SW1
switches, always use the switches in preference to the links. A switch
‘On’ corresponds to a link ‘In’.
For full detail of the configuration applicable to an installation, refer to

the folders in the Signalling Equipment Room. The default settings for
the links LK14, LK15, LK16 and LK17 parallel to the power supply are
described in the sections that follow. Although links are described, use
the equivalent switches (see figure A.64) if SW1 is present.

The data transfer rates for the event recorder interface and the techni-
cian interface are configured by LK14 and LK15. The links are set as
follows:
Data Transfer Rate LK14 LK15
1200 bps Out Out
2400 bps In Out
9600 bps Out In
4800 bps (default) In In
Table A66: Data Transfer Rate — Setting — DM128
A.15.5.2 Mnemonic Selection Default
The language used by the DM128 is configured by LK16. The link is set as
follows:
Printed / Displayed LK16
Mnemonic Names (default) Out
Mnemonic Numbers In
Table A67: Mnemonic Language — Setting — DM128
A.15.5.3 Command Echo Default
The echoing of commands by the DM128 is configured by LK17. The link

is set as follows:
Commands LK17
Echo Commands (default) Out
Commands Not Echoed In
Table A68: Echo Command — Setting — DM128
A battery is used to maintain data in non-volatile memory during normal

operation. The DM128 is shipped with the battery disconnected so LK18
(operate/ship jumper) must be moved to the ‘operate’ position before the
system is powered up.
To prolong battery life, LK18 should be moved to the ‘ship’ position if the
module is to be taken out of service and put into storage, but only after
any data has been extracted.
Dual battery plugs are provided so that the data in non-volatile memory is
maintained while changing the battery. The replacement battery should be
fitted to the second battery plug before removing the original (flat) battery.
This will ensure power is always available to the non-volatile memory.
Caution: Do not leave both batteries connected for any longer than necessary
to affect the change or you might reduce the life of the new battery.
A.15.6 Indications
A.15.6.1 Start Up
None.
A.15.6.2 Operation
Ignore the red LED that is close to the green Watchdog LED.
None

External Connections to the DM128 are made via the SIO232PFM for the
Event Recorder and via the front of the DM module for the Technician
Interface.
A.15.7.1 Event Recorder Interface
RS232 interface, and a 2 way plug and socket Klippon type BLA/SLA (not
used).

Figure A.65: External Connections—SIO232 PFM—DM128
Pin Function
Table A69: DB25 Pinout — Event Recorder Interface —

SIO232 PFM—DM128
Signal
The Signal is simplex asynchronous, data output only, and is selectable

from 1200 bits/s or 4800 bits/s. It comprises 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 parity
bit, even, and 1 stop bit.
A.15.7.2 Technician Interface
The Technician Interface is a DB25 connector on the front edge of the DM

module.
Pin Function
Table A70: DB25 Pinout—Technician Interface—DM128
Signal
The Signal is Duplex Asynchronous, selectable from 1200 bits/s or 4800

bits/s and comprises 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 parity bit, even, and 1 stop
bit.
A cable with one of the following configurations will allow the connec-
tion of a personal computer to either the technician interface or the event
recorder interface.
Figure A.66: Interface Cable Configuration—DM128

Power Supply Unit (PSU)
A.16 Power Supply Unit (PSU)
A.16.1 Description
The PSU converts the incoming 24 V supply to the voltage levels required
for by all WESTRACE modules.
A.16.2 Particulars
The PSU comprises a single printed circuit board.
A.16.3 Characteristics of PSU 24

Input Voltage Range 20–30 Vdc
Output Voltages as shown:
+ 5 Vdc @ 5 A max
+12 Vdc @ 0.5 A max
−12 Vdc @ 0.5 A max
+12 V Power @ 2.5 A max
Only one PSU can be installed per system housing, however additional
PSUs may (optionally) be installed in other housings in multiple housing
installations.
The PSU has a pre-assigned position on the VLE backplane. All other
positions are occupied by other modules or blanker cards.
A.16.4 Function
The PSU generates the internal power supply voltages, and contains the
System Reset line for other VLE modules.
The PSU is not processor based and therefore does not perform self-tests
and does not participate in Health Monitoring functions.
The absence of any voltage, or a departure from the voltage specification

will lead to the system reset line becoming active which will force a
system reset.
None
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
A.16.6 Indications
The PSU contains five red LEDs, which indicate the presence of the input
and output voltages. All LEDs should be illuminated when power is
applied to the system.
Figure A67: Power Indicator LEDs—PSU

Protection and Filter Modules (PFMs)
A.17 Protection and Filter Modules (PFMs)
A.17.1 Description
PFMs are used to isolate the clean internal WESTRACE environment
from the ‘dirty’ external electrical environment by providing screening,
filtering and overvoltage protection.
The WESTRACE housing must be fully enclosed and earthed to protect

the internal environment from external EMI. Inputs to the system, and
outputs from the system have to pass through this barrier so an input/
output module specific PFM is used to isolate WESTRACE from external
interference. By screening incoming and outgoing signals in this way,
the effects of conducted EMI are considerably reduced.
As the PFM is a vital module. PCB tracks are arranged so that short
circuits between adjacent tracks will not cause a wrong side failure.
None.
A.17.3 Indications
None.
VLE Backplane
A.18 VLE Backplane
A.18.1 Description
The VLE Backplane is used to interconnect all system modules in the
VLE. It comprises a single printed circuit board with parallel tracks and
female DIN connectors which straddle those tracks. WESTRACE
modules plug into the DIN connectors.
There may be up to four housings and VLE backplanes in a single

WESTRACE installation. Each backplane is fitted with DB37 connectors
for connection to other VLE backplanes. Special cabling is used for inter-
connecting backplanes where more than one system backplane is
required.
Refer to the circuit book in the Signal Equipment Room for information
regarding the link settings on the backplane.
A.18.3 Indications
None.

Blanker Card
A.19 Blanker Card
A.19.1 Description
Blanker cards are used to maintain continuity of vital signals across the
VLE backplane. A blanker card and a PFM blanker plate must be fitted
in any unused input/output module slot.
None.
A.19.3 Indications
None.
A.20

Housing Systems
A.21 Housing Systems

There are four system configurations of WESTRACE. The maintenance
technician may need to check that the cables (EC1, EC2 etc) are correctly
fitted and that the links (LK1, LK2, LK3 and LK4) are either installed or
not. Compare figures A.68 to A.71 with the actual installations.
Figure A.68: Single Housing System
Figure A.69: Two Housing System
Housing Systems
Figure A.70: Three Housing System

Housing Systems
Figure A.71: Four Housing System
A.22

Appendix B—Diagnostic Module Technician
Interface
APPENDIX B—DIAGNOSTIC MODULE TECHNICIAN

INTERFACE
This appendix describes the fundamental features of the Diagnostic

Module Technician Interface.
The information herein only applies to the DM and DM128 Diagnostic

Modules.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 B-1

Appendix B–Diagnostic Module Technician
Interface
General Description
B.1 General Description

The Diagnostic Module has two serial ports for system diagnostics:
• Event Recorder—serial port at the rear of the Diagnostic Module.
This interface provides a continual stream of data containing
change-of-state information about the operation of the installation. It
can be connected to a PC running MoviolaW, a dumb terminal, serial
printer or mass storage device.
• Technician Interface—serial port at the front of the Diagnostic
Module.
This interface provides access to the information stored in the
Diagnostic Module. Access is through the use of commands entered
on a terminal or through a PC running MoviolaW.
Commands entered through a terminal are concluded by pressing the
ENTER or RETURN key. Commands entered through MoviolaW are via a
Windows NT dialog box and the command is sent by using the
appropriate control button.
Note: The command echo default switch SW1/4 on the DM128 module must
be set to the OFF position to execute these functions. There is no
equivalent switch on the DM module.
B.2 Event Recorder Interface

The Event Recorder monitors the following WESTRACE Installation
information:
• CLEAR Clear Stored Information.
• DATE_TIME Diagnostic Module Date and Time Reference
• EVENT VLE Mnemonic States.
• EVENT Overflow of Event buffer
• FAULT WESTRACE System Fault Information.
• FAULT Overflow of Fault buffer
• MODULE WESTRACE Module Information
• VLE_DATA VLE Status Information.
B.2.1 CLEAR
The Clear Information is generated by a CLEAR command sent to the
Technician Interface.
A typical response is:
CLEAR 23:MAY at 13:56:00 Event NVRam Cleared
The response contains the current date and time followed by what infor-
mation was cleared.
B-2 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Interface
Event Recorder Interface
B.2.2 DATE_TIME
The Date Time information is generated when the date or time is
changed by a command sent to the Technician Interface at midnight.
A typical response is:
DATE_TIME 21:MAY at 00:00:00
DATE_TIME 21:JUL at 12:09:54 Year 91
The information contains the current date and time. The year is also
displayed when the date or time is changed.
B.2.3 EVENT
The Event Information is generated whenever a mnemonic state changes
or a buffer overflow occurs.
For example:
EVENT 13:MAR at 04:05:10 - 0010 Changes

OP2J-0, OP2JR-1, OP9JR-1, OP1-1,
OP2-0, OP3-1, OP4-0, OP5-0,
HGE-0, DGE-1
The information contains the current date and time followed by the
number of changes, and the logic states which changed with their new
state.
EVENT 09:DEC at 01:08:04 NVRam Overflow. Events lost
The information contains the current date and time followed by what
information has been overflowed or lost.
B.2.4 FAULT
The Fault Information is generated whenever a WESTRACE fault is
detected or a buffer overflow occurs.
For example:
FAULT 11:DEC at 11:35:17 NVC232 is 01H

in Housing 1 at Slot 12 with Software Version 1
module name, the fault description, details of the module location and
software version.
FAULT 06:JAN at 12:08:43 NVRam Overflow. Faults lost
The information contains the current date and time followed by what
information has been overflowed or lost.

Interface
Technician Interface
B.2.5 MODULE
The module information is generated once all of the details have been
received by the Diagnostic Module from the VLM/HVLM.
For example:
MODULE 12:DEC at 10:00:51, 03 Modules in Installation

DM ------------------- with Software Version 01
VLM/HVLM in Housing 1 at Slot 03 with Software
Version 01
NVC in Housing 1 at Slot 04 with Software
Version 02
number of modules in the installation and each module's details.
B.2.6 VLE_DATA
The VLE status information will be displayed during various phases of
operation.
For example:
VLE_DATA 23:JUL at 08:00:24 Address 123456, Version 01,

Logic States 0200, During Initialisation
installation address and version number, the number of mnemonics
(logic state) used and phase of operation.
Logic States 0234, During Normal Operation
B.3 Technician Interface

When the power is applied to the diagnostic module an identification
message is output as shown below:
TECHNICIAN INTERFACE
(HE for Help)>
The Technician Interface responds the following commands. The

commands are entered by typing the first two characters of the
command. Letters following and including the * should not be entered.
- CL*EAR Clear Diagnostic Module NVRam.

- CO*NFIG Display installation configuration information
- DA*TE Display and Set the Diagnostic Module Date and/
or time
- DI*SPLAY Display Mnemonic states
- EV*ENT Display Diagnostic Module events
- FA*ULT Display Diagnostic Module faults
Interface
- HE*LP Display Diagnostic Module Help.

- MO*DULE Display WESTRACE modules
- PR*INT Print WESTRACE mnemonic states
- VL*E Display WESTRACE installation status
information
Commands which are being processed by the Diagnostic Module are

subject to the following control key codes:
<ctrlS> suspend command

<ctrlQ> resume command
<ctrlX> abort command.
B.3.1 CLEAR
The Clear command allows Diagnostic Module non-volatile RAM data
areas to be cleared. The data areas are event data and fault data.
The following are valid commands:
CL clears all logged faults and events.

CL EV clears all events logged in event buffer.
CL FA clears all faults logged in faults buffer.
Input and responses are shown below, the responses appear both on the
technician interface and the event recorder.
CL<CR>
CLEAR 23:MAY at 13:56:00 Fault NVRam Cleared
CL EV<CR>
CL FA<CR>
CLEAR 25:MAY at 13:56:00 Fault NVRam Cleared
B.3.2 CONFIGURATION
The Configuration command allows configuration information to be
displayed.
CO displays the installation configuration data
Input and responses are shown below, the responses appear on the tech-
nician interface only.
CO<CR>
CONFIG CED Information
Installation Name: SOUTH MELBOURNE
Installation Address: 001122
Configuration Data Version: 1

Interface
The configuration information is displayed for the name, address and

version.
B.3.3 DATE_TIME
The Date_Time command allows the day, month, year and/or the hour,
minute, seconds to be displayed or changed.
DA displays the current date

DA DD:MMM:YY sets date
DA HH:MM:SS sets time
DA DD:MMM:YY,HH:MM:SS sets both date and time
DA<CR>
DATE_TIME 02:JUN at 10:05:00
DA 21:MAY:95<CR>
DATE_TIME 21:MAY at 10:05:00 Year 95
DA 08:00:01<CR>
DATE_TIME 21:MAY at 08:00:01 Year 95
DA 22:JUL:91,10:00:04<CR>
DATE_TIME 22:JUL at 10:00:04 Year 91
B.3.4 DISPLAY
The Display command allows the current logic elements to be displayed.
DI displays all elements

DI <nnn> particular elements
DI <mnemonic> state of a particular mnemonic
DI <nnn>,<nnn> range of elements
DI<CR>
STATES Range 0001 to 1000
001 10010110101001010010101101010010101000001010010100
051 10010110101001010010101101010010101000001010010100
... ..................................................
... ..................................................
951 10010110101001010010101101010010101000001010010100
DI OPCR<CR>
STATES OPCR 1
Interface
D1 101<CR>
101 10010101010100000101010101011111001011111111000011
DI 710,765<CR>
701 11000000000010100101011010100101010000010100101001
751 01111111111111111111110000000000000010010111011000
Each line contains a logic state number followed by 50 logic states. The
logic state refers to the first logic state on a line.
B.3.5 EVENT
The Event command allows the history of events to be displayed.
EV info on events
EV <nnn> particular event number
EV <nnn>, <nnn> range of events
EV DD:MMM all events on a particular date
EV<CR>
EVENT No Entries
EV<CR>
EVENT Details from 023 to 022 (circular buffer full)
EV 17<CR>
EVENT 017 13:MAR at 04:05:10 - 0003 Changes
OPJ-1, OP9J-0, OP9JR-1
EV 17,19<CR>
OPJ-1, OPJR-0, OP9JR-1
DGE-1, HGE-0, HGEJR-1
OP2J-1, OP2JR-0, OP9JR-1, OP1-0,
OP2-1, OP3-0, OP4-1, OP5-0
EV 21:DEC<CR>
EVENT 078 21:DEC at 10:09:10 - 0001 Changes
HGE-0
EVENT 080 21:DEC at 10:09:11 - 0001 Changes
HGE-1
The first line specifies the event record number, date, time and number
of changes. The subsequent lines display the logic states which changed
with the new logic state displayed.
B.3.6 FAULT
The Fault command allows fault entries to be displayed.

Interface
FA info on faults
FA <nnn> particular fault number
FA <nnn>,<nnn> range of faults
FA DD:MMM all faults on a particular date
FA<CR>
FAULT No Entries
FA<CR>
FAULT Details from 005 to 004 (circular buffer full)
FA 5<CR>
FAULT 005 11:DEC at 11:35:17 NVC232 is 01H
in Housing 1 Slot 34 with Software Version 01
FA 7,10<CR>
FAULT 007 13:JAN at 00:09:54 VPIM is 2EH
FAULT 008 02:SEP at 23:13:13 VLOM50 is 01H
FAULT 009 13:NOVat15:20:14 VTC232 is 2DH
FAULT 010 29:FEB at 03:33:15 VLM/HVLM is DCH
FA 23:MAY<CR>
FAULT 043 23:MAYat12:00:00 VLM/HVLM is DCH
The information contains the fault record number, date and time,
module type and fault description, followed by the module information.
B.3.7 HELP
The Help command gives information on all commands their function
and their parameters.
HE General help information

HE <value> Help information on particular command
Where <value> is an abbreviated command.
For example:
HE MO<CR>
B.3.8 MODULE
The Module command allows module entries to be displayed.
Interface
MO information on all modules
MO<CR>
MODULE Modules in Range 00 to 03
00 DM ------------------- with Software Version 01
01 VLM/HVLM in Housing 1 at Slot 03 with Software
Version 02
02 VPIM in Housing 1 at Slot 04 with Software
Version 01
03 NVC232 in Housing 1 at Slot 05 with Software
Version 02
The range of modules to be displayed is shown initially. Information

relating to each module of the range then appears on separate lines.
B.3.9 PRINT
The Print command allows the logic states corresponding to mnemonics
states to be printed.
PR all elements
PR <nnnn> particular element number
PR <mnemonic> state of a particular mnemonic
PR <nnnn>,<nnnn> range of elements
PR<CR>
001 10010110101001010010101101010010101000001010010100
051 10010110101001010010101101010010101000001010010100
951 10010110101001010010101101010010101000001010010100
PR 100<CR>
051 10010101010110100101010101010101010100101010101010
PR NOPCR<CR>
STATES NOPCR 1
PR 505,575<CR>
501 100010010111001010010101101010010101000001010010100
551 100101101010101101000101010000000101001010010101110
Each line contains a logic state number followed by 50 logic states. The
logic state refers to the first logic state on a line.

Interface
B.3.10 VLE
The VLE command displays the diagnostic status information.
The following is the valid command:
VL displays status information
VL<CR>
VLE_DATA Address 123456, Version 01,
Appendix C—Diagnostic Module Logging
Package
APPENDIX C—DIAGNOSTIC MODULE LOGGING

PACKAGE
This appendix contains details of the Diagnostic Module Logging Package.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 C-1

Appendix C–Diagnostic Module Logging
Package
General Description
C.1 General Description

The WESTRACE Diagnostic Module Logging Package is a PC based
front-end to the WESTRACE Diagnostic Module. It provides:
• Maintenance access to both serial ports of the DM simultaneously;
• Transfer of logged events from the Event Recorder Interface to the
PC’s hard disk;
• A Technician Interface to enable commands to be sent to the DM.
WESTRACE systems that include a DM128 may use MoviolaW as an

alternative to the WESTRACE Diagnostic Module Logging Package.
MoviolaW provides Microsoft Windows-based diagnostic and logging
applications.
This section describes the WESTRACE Diagnostic Module Logging Pack-

age only, not MoviolaW. For information about MoviolaW see the First
Line Maintenance Manual and the MoviolaW User Manual.
C.2 Hardware Requirements

The PC hardware requirements for running the WESTRACE Diagnostic
Module Logging Package are these:
• An IBM-compatible personal computer (PC), with an 80386 (or later)
central processor;
• DOS version 3.3 or later;
• At least 640kB of RAM;
• A hard disk for event logging;
• A 720kB or 1.44 MB floppy disk drive.
C.3 Installation
To install the package, copy the file LOG.EXE into the sub directory in
which you want the package to reside. All disk event logging will be
placed in this sub-directory.
C.4 Running the Package

To run the package, enter the following command at the DOS prompt in
the directory where the package resides:
LOG -E<com_port>,<int_level>,<baud> -T<com_port>,<int_level>,<baud>
Where:
-E is the event recorder interface port on the PC
-T is the technician interface port on the PC
C-2 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Package
Event Logging
com_port is the PC serial communications COM port that

you want to use. Valid options are COM1, COM2,
COM3 or COM4.
int_level is the PC interrupt level for the COM port to be
used. Valid options are 3, 4, 5 or 7.
baud is the data transfer rate of the interface.
Valid options are 1200 or 4800. Ensure that the
data transfer rate selected is compatible with the
setup on the DM installed.
For example:
To set up the PC to use COM1 for the event recorder interface and COM2
for the technician interface with both interfaces operating at 4800 bps,
use the following command:
LOG -ECOM1,4,4800 -TCOM2,3,4800
Note: A small batch file may be written to execute this command.
If only one serial port is available on the PC then both interface configu-
rations should be set up identically.
C.5 Event Logging

The package provides a facility for logging all the data from the event
recorder interface. This facility can be turned on and off by using the
command ALT T, see section C.6.
The name of disk file receiving event logging data is displayed in the top
left corner of the event recorder part of the screen. The log filename
comprises the PC’s current system date and the extension.LOG.
If the logging package is restarted a number of times in one day and

logging is performed on these separate occasions, the new logging data is
appended to the existing file. The package will create a new logging file if
none exists. If lengthy periods of logging are conducted over several
days, the package will create a new logging file at 00:00 hours on each
day.
Note: The PC time may differ slightly from the DM time. If you are
checking data which was logged at either end of the day you should
also check the data recorded by previous or next day's log file as
appropriate.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 C-3

Package
Commands
C.6 Commands
The following commands are available for controlling the operation of
the package. These commands are invoked by pressing the ALT key and
then, while still depressing the ALT key, pressing the letter key on the
keyboard such that both the ALT key and the letter key are depressed
simultaneously.
C.6.1 ALT H
This command will display help information in the technician interface
part of the screen. The help information comprises a list of the available
commands.
C.6.2 ALT D
This command will invoke the DOS command interrupter and present a
DOS prompt. To return to the package you must type EXIT at the DOS
prompt.
For example:
C:\>exit
C.6.3 ALT T
This command will toggle the disk event recording on and off. The
current status of the logging is displayed in the technician part of the
screen.
C.6.4 ALT X
This command will exit you from the package and return you to the DOS
prompt.
C.6.5 Diagnostic Module Commands

Commands to the Diagnostic Module via the Technician Interface are
entered by typing them on the keyboard. The DM prompt ‘>’ will appear
on the Technician Interface part of the screen. You may need to press
ENTER a few times to get the DM to display the prompt. All DM commands
are available except those which use control characters. Refer to the
Diagnostic Module Technician interface for further information regard-
ing DM commands.
C-4 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Appendix D—MoviolaW
APPENDIX D—MOVIOLAW
This appendix contains an overview of using MoviolaW as a service tool

for WESTRACE.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 D-1

Appendix D–MoviolaW
General Description
D.1 General Description

MoviolaW is an excellent tool for commissioning and maintaining
WESTRACE based systems.
How MoviolaW is used will depend upon:

• The rail network and WESTRACE installation to which MoviolaW is
connected;
• The type of problem or fault under consideration;
• Personal experience with the systems.
The purpose of MoviolaW is to:

• Monitor WESTRACE events and other railway signal logic in near
real time;
• Collect the data from WESTRACE and then play it back at the user’s
convenience.
The purpose of this section is to provide tips and techniques on using

MoviolaW for maximum effectiveness. The MoviolaW User Manual has
specific instructions for operating MoviolaW. All of this information
should be adapted to suit the task and personal knowledge of the system.
D.2 Installation and Hardware Requirements

MoviolaW can be connected to a local WESTRACE system or through a
modem or local area network to a remote WESTRACE system. A local
MoviolaW system is usually dedicated to the local WESTRACE whereas
a remote MoviolaW can connect, at various times, to one or more
WESTRACE systems. In all cases, the WESTRACE system must be fitted
with a DM128, an NVC/DM, an NCDM or similar diagnostic module.
An NVC/DM is required if the WESTRACE system is to dial-up Movio-

laW. An NCDM is required for a local area network connection.
MoviolaW is normally installed on a dedicated personal computer (PC).
D.3 Operational Overview

MoviolaW collects and displays events it receives from the diagnostic
module(s) in a WESTRACE system. An event is generated every time
something changes state in the monitored system. MoviolaW adds events
to an event log in the order they are received from WESTRACE.
D.3.1 Real Time or Replay

Real time mode—called ‘Indications’ mode which is a nearly real time
display of events as they happen. A green bar is displayed, bottom right
hand side of the screen, while MoviolaW is receiving data from
WESTRACE.
D-2 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Operational Overview
Replay mode—replays event stored in the log so that they can be

observed off-line. A red bar is displayed, bottom right hand side of the
screen. In this mode, MoviolaW is receiving data from WESTRACE in
the background.
Events can be replayed:

• forward or backward;
• slower, faster or at the original recording rate.
D.3.2 Faults and Failures

Failures—are problems with equipment external to WESTRACE and
will only be indicated if allowed by the local application configuration.
• MoviolaW detects failures by associating them with defined
combinations of its inputs;
Conversely, MoviolaW cannot detect failures that are not defined,
therefore some failures may not be observed;
• Other mnemonics may provide limited information on failures.
Faults—are problems with the WESTRACE equipment that have been

logged by the diagnostic module.
• Use the Faults or Failures windows to identify equipment problems;
• See Chapter 7 of this manual for information on interpreting fault
codes;
• See Appendix A of this manual for the meaning of the fault codes
generated by WESTRACE modules;
Remember that each WESTRACE module will produce a fault code
when the system shuts down. You must analyse the logged data to
find the faulty module that triggered the shut-down. Use the Replay
mode to replay events leading up to shut down time.
D.3.3 Track Diagram

The track diagram is a graphical representation of the section of railway
connected to the WESTRACE system. Physical features such as track,
points and signals are represented by graphical elements and the
diagram in its entirety provides a convenient overview of the railway.
The diagram is often useful for picking when there has been an opera-
tional problem although often it doesn’t provide full details of the prob-
lem.
Use the track diagram to observe the operation of any area of interest.
Use the replay facility to:

• Determine the time of a problem;
• Step through each cycle surrounding a problem;
Use other techniques described later to reduce the scope of the problem.

D.3.4 Events Window

This window displays the 100 (can be altered) most recent changes of
state of the Interlocking’s mnemonics (variables), in historical order. It
can operate in either ‘Indications’ or ‘Replay’ mode.
The state of a mnemonic is represented thus:
0 represents de-energised
1 " energised.
Use the window to:

• Monitor change of state of inputs, outputs and internal states as they
occur (indicator mode);
• Step through cycle by cycle to observe what has happened (replay
mode);
• Isolate variables with a changed state by eliminating all that remain
steady.
D.3.5 Variables Window

This window displays all of the Interlocking’s mnemonics (variables) in
alphanumeric order together with the variable’s current state. It can
operate in either ‘Indications’ or ‘Replay’ mode.
The state of a mnemonic is represented thus:
0 represents de-energised
1 " energised.
Use the window to:

• Check the current state of any variable;
• Determine if there is a short cut to finding the cause of a problem.
D.3.6 Faults Window

This window displays the last 50 faults that occurred in the interlocking.
Any significant fault (that results in WESTRACE shutting down) is
marked with a red arrow.
Use the window to see:

• The time and date of a fault;
• The affected driver;
• A description of the fault and the associated fault code.
D.3.7 Failures Window

This window displays faults in the interlocking as they occur. Faults are
shown in chronological order and they disappear from the window as
they are resolved.

• The time and date of a failure;
• A description of the failure.
D.3.8 Operations Window

This window displays a list of operations performed by a WESTRACE
when the WESTRACE includes an NVC/DM or NCDM.

• The time and date of an operation;
• The associated driver;
• The operation code for the operation.
D.3.9 Commands Window

This window displays a list of commands sent from the Control Centre to
the interlocking.

• The time and date of a command;
• The command itself.
D.3.10 Reports Window

This window can display five different reports chosen from a dialog box:
• Variables Report—provides details of selected variables during a
selectable time interval. A choice from three types of Variables
Report is available:
• Show initial status and changes;
• Count changes to one;
• Count changes to zero;
• Fault Report—provides details of faults that occurred during a
selectable time interval;
• Failure Report—provides details of failures during a selectable
time interval. A choice from two types of Failure Report is available:
• Faults that happened;
• Faults repaired.
• Commands Report—provides details of commands sent from the
Control Centre during a selectable time interval;
• Operations Report—provides details of operations executed in a
WESTRACE that contains an NVC/DM or NCDM during a selectable
time period;
Reports can be useful for determining how many times a variable

changed state or whether a variable indicates a possible failure.
For example:
• Loss of point detection;
• Track circuit bobbing;
• Control lever operated.

Communication with NVC/DM or NCDM
D.3.11 Hardware Window

This window lists all of the hardware modules installed at the monitored
site.
Use the window to:

• Determine the type of diagnostic module feeding information to
MoviolaW;
• Compare the presence and position of WESTRACE hardware with
what should be there according to the GCSS printout.
D.3.12 Housing Window

This window graphically display all of the hardware modules fitted to
WESTRACE housings installed at the monitored site. This window can
be used for the same purposes as the Hardware Window.
D.3.13 DM128 Driver Window

This window displays communications between WESTRACE and Movi-
olaW (local only).
The standard window has two parts:

• An upper window displaying WESTRACE events received from the
diagnostic module;
• A lower window displaying all other communications between
MoviolaW and WESTRACE.
Use the window to:

• Check communication activity between MoviolaW and WESTRACE;
• Open a dialog box and send commands to the diagnostic module.
See Appendix B in this manual for information about diagnostic
module commands.
Note: Do not close this window. It must remain in a minimised state to

maintain MoviolaW-WESTRACE communications.
D.4 Communication with NVC/DM or NCDM
D.4.1 Passwords
Communication with an NVC/DM or NCDM through a serial diagnostic
port or NCDM through the network requires the use of passwords. Every
NVC/DM or NCDM has default passwords in its Non-vital Configuration.
It may also have been configured with other passwords that override the
defaults.
Telemetry Statistics for NVC/DM or NCDM
To communicate with a particular NVC/DM or NCDM, MoviolaW must

have the appropriate passwords in its .ini file. If these passwords are
not correct, MoviolaW has a menu for changing them.
D.4.2 Dial Out Numbers for NVC/DM or NCDM

The NVC/DM or NCDM (NVLM) dials out if it logs a fault which has not
yet been uploaded to MoviolaW. The NVLM will try to configured tele-
phone numbers at defined intervals until connection is successful. As
soon as the upload is complete, NVLM hangs up.
These telephone numbers and the NVLM serial diagnostic ports to be

used are set through MoviolaW.
Note: The telephone numbers of a ‘dial out only’ port can be set though
another diagnostic port.
D.4.3 NVC/DM Driver Window

This window displays communications between WESTRACE and Movi-
olaW when the WESTRACE includes an NVC/DM or NCDM.
The window has two parts:

• An upper part displaying the state WESTRACE mnemonics;
• A lower part displaying all other communications between
MoviolaW and WESTRACE.
Use the window to:

• Check communication activity between MoviolaW and WESTRACE;
• Open a dialog box and send commands to the NVC/DM or NCDM
module.
Note: Do not close this window. It must remain in a minimised state to

maintain MoviolaW-WESTRACE communications.
D.5 Telemetry Statistics for NVC/DM or NCDM

Telemetry statistics are only available when the WESTRACE system is
fitted with an NVC/DM or NCDM.
a) Open the Tests dialog box from the NVC/DM Driver window;
b) Select Get Port Statistics or Get Module Statistics;
c) Enter Port Number;
d) Wait for message ‘Received Msgs’.

Telemetry Statistics for NVC/DM or NCDM
Other options available for step b are:

• Get Event Number;
• Get Fault Number
• Get Operation Number;
• Get Snapshot;
• Get Events;
• Get Faults
• Get Operations;
• Get CED;
• Set CED;
• Get CED Summary;
• Login;
• Logout;
• Clear Event Buffer;
• Clear Fault Buffer;
• Clear Operation Buffer;
• Set Time and Date;
• Get Time and Date;
• Set Password;
• Set Telephone Number;
• Get Telephone Number;
• Get Module Information;
• Vital Bar Command;
• Get Status;
• Get Installation Address;
• Get Logged Data;
• Reset Statistics.
Further options for NCDM (only) are these:

• Get VLM6 Statistics;
• Reset VLM6 Statistics;
• Get VLM6 Channel Statistics;
• Get Network Session Statistics.
APPENDIX E—GETLOG UTILITY
This appendix describes the use of the GETLOG utility in extracting

logged data from an NVC/DM or NCDM.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 E-1

Introduction
E.1 Introduction
GETLOG is a simple DOS command line utility for extracting logged data
from an NVC/DM or NCDM. This section describes how it is used.
E.2 Operation
GETLOG has three main modes of operation:
Status displays NVC/DM or NCDM status and VLM status, then

exit.
Upload displays status, then upload some or all previously logged

events, faults or operations, then continuously poll for and
display new log data until a key is pressed.
Menu displays status, then display a menu allowing certain diag-

nostic commands to be sent.
GETLOG is invoked at the DOS command line. See section E.3 for details.
E.2.1 Status Display

The sample below shows typical information displayed when GETLOG is
run. This information provides gives a quick overview of the current
WESTRACE system status.
Next Fault: 8
Next Operation: 11
Next Event: 81
Installation Addr: 0xaadd84
Date/Time: 21/07/2000 17:36:35.5
CED Version: 1
CED Size: 2560
VLM CED Version: 1
VLM CED Size: 131072
VLE Phase: APPDEL
Modules:
Unknown Addr:c1 SW Ver:0a
Unknown Addr:31 SW Ver:04
NVCDM Addr:79 SW Ver:04
In the example above:

• Eight faults have been logged (Fault #0 to Fault #7); the next fault to
be logged will be Fault #8;
Also 11 operations have been logged (Operation #0 to Operation #10),
and 81 events have been logged (Event #0 to Event #80);
• The WESTRACE installation address is AADD84 (hex);
Unlike the installation address value displayed in GCSS, the value
reported by GETLOG includes the three parity bits, so it should
match the value set by the 24 links on the vital backplane card;
• The current NVC/DM or NCDM time is as shown;
• The NVC/DM or NCDM CED data version is 1 and the size of the CED
E-2 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Operation
is 2560 bytes (rounded up to the nearest 128 bytes);

• The HVLM128 CED data version is 1 and the size is 131072 bytes (ie.
128 kbyte);
• The VLE Phase is currently Application Delay;
• There are four WESTRACE modules installed, with the specified
backplane addresses and software versions;
GETLOG does not currently extract the module types from the VLM
CED, hence all module types (apart from the NVC/DM or NCDM) are
shown as ‘Unknown’.
Note: CED is an old term. I now only applies to the original VLM module
now known as VLM1.
Elsewhere in this manual, a VLM CED is known as ‘Vital PROM
Data’ and an NVC/DM or NCDM CED is known as ‘Non-vital Config-
uration’.
E.2.2 Upload Display

The sample below shows fault, operation and event data which has been
extracted from the NVC/DM or NCDM. Faults are always listed first,
then operations, then events.
Note: GETLOG does not distinguish between NVC/DM and NCDM in what
it displays.
The following information is listed for each fault:

• Fault number;
• Date/time;
• Module backplane address (in this example all faults are NVC/DM or
NCDM internal faults);
• Fault code, and for NVC/DM or NCDM faults, a translation of the
fault code into English.
The following information is listed for each operation:

• Operation number;
• Date/time;
• Operation code and a translation of the operation code into English;
• Any additional logged data.
The following information is listed for each event:

• Event number;
• Date/time;
• Mnemonic name (with ‘NV_’ prefix for non-vital and ‘V_’ for vital)
and value (1 for energised, 0 for de-energised);
Mnemonic names are only displayed if the –i option was used to
specify a CED image file.

Operation
FLT 0: 21/07/2000 17:24:15.0 NVCDM-79 0800 NVRAM LOST

FLT 1: 21/07/2000 17:24:36.8 NVCDM-79 3019 PORT 3 MODULE 1 TIMEOUT
FLT 2: 21/07/2000 17:24:46.8 NVCDM-79 2001 PORT 2 TIMEOUT
FLT 3: 21/07/2000 17:35:23.8 NVCDM-79 3019 PORT 3 MODULE 1 TIMEOUT
FLT 4: 21/07/2000 17:35:33.8 NVCDM-79 2001 PORT 2 TIMEOUT
FLT 5: 21/07/2000 17:35:40.0 NVCDM-79 2000 PORT 2 OK
OPR 0: 21/07/2000 17:24:15.0 0900 WESTRACE RESTART ''

OPR 1: 21/07/2000 17:24:29.0 0600 VLM STATUS CHANGED '0'
OPR 4: 21/07/2000 17:35:02.0 0900 WESTRACE RESTART ''
OPR 6: 21/07/2000 17:35:40.2 0101 LOGIN FAILED 'P2 password'
OPR 7: 21/07/2000 17:35:50.0 0100 LOGIN 'P2 read'
OPR 9: 21/07/2000 17:36:21.2 0104 FORCED LOGOUT 'P2'
EVT 0: 21/07/2000 17:24:15.0 Restart Record

EVT 1: 21/07/2000 17:24:15.0 NV_NVCDMOK = 1
EVT 2: 21/07/2000 17:24:15.0 NV_PORTSOK = 1
EVT 3: 21/07/2000 17:24:15.0 NV_NAPPDEL = 1
EVT 4: 21/07/2000 17:24:15.0 NV_NSTRDEL = 1
EVT 5: 21/07/2000 17:24:16.7 NV_nvrom1 = 1
EVT 6: 21/07/2000 17:24:16.7 NV_nvrom2 = 1
EVT 7: 21/07/2000 17:24:16.7 NV_nvrom3 = 1
EVT 8: 21/07/2000 17:24:16.7 NV_nvrom4 = 1
EVT 9: 21/07/2000 17:24:16.7 NV_nvrom5 = 1
EVT 10: 21/07/2000 17:24:16.7 NV_nvrom6 = 1
EVT 11: 21/07/2000 17:24:16.7 NV_nvrom7 = 1
EVT 12: 21/07/2000 17:24:16.7 NV_nvrom8 = 1
EVT 13: 21/07/2000 17:24:19.8 NV_NSTRDEL1 = 1
EVT 14: 21/07/2000 17:24:29.1 V_NVCSEL = 1
EVT 15: 21/07/2000 17:24:29.1 V_OPCRFLT = 1
EVT 16: 21/07/2000 17:24:29.1 V_PIOFLT = 1
EVT 17: 21/07/2000 17:24:29.1 V_CONFLT = 1
EVT 18: 21/07/2000 17:24:30.5 NV_vpim2 = 1
EVT 19: 21/07/2000 17:24:30.5 NV_vpim5 = 1
EVT 20: 21/07/2000 17:24:30.5 NV_vpim7 = 1
EVT 21: 21/07/2000 17:24:30.5 NV_nvrom2 = 0
EVT 22: 21/07/2000 17:24:30.5 NV_nvrom5 = 0
EVT 23: 21/07/2000 17:24:30.5 NV_nvrom7 = 0
EVT 24: 21/07/2000 17:24:46.8 NV_PORTSOK = 0
EVT 25: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_STRDEL = 1
EVT 26: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_INTDET = 1
EVT 27: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_INTDET1 = 1
EVT 28: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_nvrom1 = 1
EVT 29: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_nvrom3 = 1
EVT 30: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_nvrom4 = 1
EVT 31: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_nvrom6 = 1
EVT 32: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_nvrom8 = 1
EVT 33: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_vpim2 = 1
EVT 34: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_vpim5 = 1
EVT 35: 21/07/2000 17:25:22.2 V_vpim7 = 1
EVT 36: 21/07/2000 17:25:25.2 V_STRDEL1 = 1
EVT 37: 21/07/2000 17:25:25.7 V_APPDEL = 1
EVT 38: 21/07/2000 17:26:17.2 NV_NAPPDEL1 = 1
EVT 39: 21/07/2000 17:27:25.8 V_APPDEL1 = 1
EVT 41: 21/07/2000 17:35:02.0 NV_NVCDMOK = 1
EVT 42: 21/07/2000 17:35:02.0 NV_PORTSOK = 1
EVT 43: 21/07/2000 17:35:02.0 NV_NAPPDEL = 1
EVT 44: 21/07/2000 17:35:02.0 NV_NSTRDEL = 1
EVT 45: 21/07/2000 17:35:03.7 NV_nvrom1 = 1
Operation

• At 17:24:15.0 the WESTRACE is restarted;
The first fault indicates the information stored in NVRAM has been
lost, possibly due to the lithium battery being flat. A special event, a
“Restart Record” is logged at this time to indicate that the state of all
mnemonics is assumed to be de-energised. Also logged at this time
are events for all non-vital mnemonics with an initial state of
energised;
• At 17:24:16.7 the first cycle of non-vital logic executes, and some
mnemonics change state as a consequence;
• At 17:24:19.8 the non-vital 3-second NSTRDEL1 timer expires;
• At 17:24:29.1 the first message is received from the VLM containing
the initial vital states;
An event is logged for any energised state, and an operation is logged
to indicate that the VLM status is now 0 (ie. initialisation);
• At 17:24:36.8 module 1 on port 3 times out so a fault is logged;
• At 17:24:46.8 port 2 (a diagnostic port) times out;
As a consequence the non-vital PORTSOK mnemonic is cleared;
• At 17:25:22.1 the VLM status changes to 1 (application delay);
• At 17:27:25.8 the vital APPDEL1 timer expires, and the VLM status
changes to 2 (normal working);
• At 17:35:02.0 the WESTRACE restarts.
E.2.3 Menu Functions

The following is the GETLOG menu:
1. Set Time
2. Get Earliest Snapshot
3. Get Latest Snapshot
4. Get Non Vital Port and Module Statistics
5. Clear Log Buffers
6. Clear Non Vital Port and Module Statistics
7. Get VLM6 Vital Port Statistics
8. Get VLM6 Vital and Non Vital Channel Statistics
9. Get Non Vital Network Session Statistics
10. Clear VLM6 Vital Port and Channel Statistics
99. Quit
These menu commands produce the following results:

• ‘1’ sets the NVC/DM or NCDM time equal to the current PC time.
• ‘2’ or ‘3’ displays a snapshot of vital and non-vital states.
This snapshot corresponds to the state of the NVC/DM or NCDM’s
event buffer, either at the start or the end.
A typical snapshot display is as follows:
Non-vital Snapshot Prior to Event 104

NV_NVCDMOK=1 NV_PORTSOK=0 NV_TIMESYNCOUT=0 NV_TIMESYNCIN=0
NV_NAPPDEL=1 NV_NAPPDEL1=1 NV_NSTRDEL=1 NV_NSTRDEL1=1
NV_RESSTATEA=0 NV_RESSTATEB=0 NV_RESSTATEC=0 NV_RESSTATED=0
NV_RESTIMERA=0 NV_RESTIMERA1=0 NV_RESTIMERB=0 NV_RESTIMERB1=0
NV_abc=0 NV_def=0 NV_ghi=0 NV_vpim1=0
NV_vpim2=1 NV_vpim3=1 NV_vpim4=1 NV_vpim5=1
NV_vpim6=1 NV_vpim7=1 NV_vpim8=0 NV_nvrom1=1

Operation
NV_nvrom2=0 NV_nvrom3=0 NV_nvrom4=0 NV_nvrom5=0

NV_nvrom6=0 NV_nvrom7=0 NV_nvrom8=1
Vital Snapshot Prior to Event 104

V_NOPCR=0 V_NVCSEL=1 V_0LOIC=0 V_1LOIC=0
V_2LOIC=0 V_3LOIC=0 V_4LOIC=0 V_5LOIC=0
V_6LOIC=0 V_7LOIC=0 V_0LOOC=0 V_1LOOC=0
V_2LOOC=0 V_3LOOC=0 V_4LOOC=0 V_5LOOC=0
V_6LOOC=0 V_7LOOC=0 V_EXOPCR=0 V_OPCRFLT=1
V_PIOFLT=1 V_RCOVER=0 V_MYMODE=0 V_SBYSTAT=0
V_SSWITCH=0 V_CONFLT=1 V_RESLATA=0 V_RESLATB=0
V_APPDEL=1 V_APPDEL1=1 V_STRDEL=1 V_STRDEL1=1
V_INTDET=1 V_INTDET1=1 V_RESTMA=0 V_RESTMA1=0
V_RESTMB=0 V_RESTMB1=0 V_RESTMC=0 V_RESTMC1=0
V_RESTMD=0 V_RESTMD1=0 V_t1in=0 V_t1out=0
V_t2in=0 V_t2out=0 V_nvrom1=1 V_nvrom2=0
V_nvrom3=0 V_nvrom4=0 V_nvrom5=0 V_nvrom6=0
V_nvrom7=0 V_nvrom8=1 V_vpim1=0 V_vpim2=1
V_vpim3=1 V_vpim4=1 V_vpim5=1 V_vpim6=1
V_vpim7=1 V_vpim8=0
• ‘4’ displays telemetry statistics for each port and S2 Address.

These show number of:
• messages transmitted;
• messages received;
• line errors (eg bad CRC);
• overload errors and number of data errors (badly formatted or
inconsistent messages).
A typical statistics display follows below; (note that in this example
port 3, a WSA/S2 master port, has sent 3844 messages to S2 Address 1
but has received no replies—this would cause an S2 Address timeout
fault).
Port 1 -
Port 2 TX:108 RX:109 LineErr:0 OvldErr:0 DataErr:0
Module 1 TX:3844 RX:0 Retry:0 DataErr:0
Port 5 -
Port 6 -
Port 7 -
• ‘5’ clears all logged fault, operation and event data on the NVC/DM or
NCDM.
• ‘6’ resets non-vital port and S2 Address statistics to zero;
• ‘7’, ‘8’, ‘9’ and ‘10’ can only be used when WESTRACE has a VLM6 and
an NCDM.
Note: Module is equivalent to ‘S2 address’ in the example above.
Command Line Parameters
E.3 Command Line Parameters

GETLOG is controlled by entering a combination of the command line
parameters described in the sections that follow. All command line
parameters are case sensitive and can be entered in any order separated
but at least 1 blank character.
Type getlog with no parameters to display a brief list of the available

parameters.
Type getlog with the parameters listed in sections E.3.1 to E.3.5 to

achieve the desired objectives.
E.3.1 Mode Selection Options
–s selects Status mode
–m selects Menu mode
–f, –o, –e selects Upload mode.

The parameters cause the following to be displayed:
-f faults,
-o operations
-e events.
Each may be followed by a record number to start at; if no

number is specified, then only new data is uploaded (i.e. data
logged after getlog started running).
Example:
getlog –f37 –o
will display faults in the NVC/DM or NCDM buffer starting at fault #37,
and any faults or operations which occur while getlog is running. No
events will be displayed.
Another example:
getlog –f0 –o –e
will display all faults in the NVC/DM or NCDM buffer, and any faults,
operations or events which occur while getlog is running. This setting
is equivalent to what the NVC/DM or NCDM MoviolaW driver does.
E.3.2 Functional Options
–v read vital CED and status information as well as non-vital
–nN assume NVC/DM or NCDM is at backplane address N (hex)—

if specified then NVC/DM or NCDM fault codes are displayed
in English

–iS read non-vital mnemonics from file S_nvcdm.img (if –v spec-

ified, also read vital mnemonics from S.img)
–d debug mode, display all messages sent and received
E.3.3 File Output Options
OutFile copy displayed output to specified file (log data, snapshot or

statistics)
–c output log data to file in CSV format (for spreadsheet import,

allows faults, events and operations to be merged and sorted
by date/time, for example)
E.3.4 Link Configuration
–bN selects baud rate (choose from 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
57600; default is 57600)
–cN selects PC COM port (default is 2)
–tN sets polling rate in msec (default is 1000)
E.3.5 Protocol Configuration
–aN selects NVC/DM or NCDM diagnostic port address (default is

1)
–prS login for read using password S (default is WESTRACE)
–pwS login for write using password S (default is WESTRACE)
The default is to login for read if neither –pr nor –pw is specified.
APPENDIX F—NGETLOG UTILITY
This appendix describes the use of the NGETLOG utility in extracting

logged data from an NCDM via a network.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 F-1

Introduction
F.1 Introduction
NGETLOG is a simple DOS command line utility for extracting logged
data from an NCDM. This section describes how it is used.
F.2 Operation
NGETLOG has three main modes of operation:
Status display NCDM status and VLM6 status, then exit.
Upload display status, then upload some or all previously logged

events, faults or operations, then continuously poll for and
display new log data until a key is pressed.
Menu display status, then display a menu allowing certain diag-

nostic commands to be sent.
NGETLOG is invoked at the DOS command line. See section F.3 for
details.
F.2.1 Status Display

The sample below shows typical information displayed when NGETLOG
is run. This information provides gives a quick overview of the current
WESTRACE system status.
Next Fault: 8
Next Operation: 11
Next Event: 81
Installation Addr: 0xaadd84
Date/Time: 21/07/2000 17:36:35.5
CED Version: 1
CED Size: 2560
VLM CED Version: 1
VLM CED Size: 131072
VLE Phase: APPDEL
Modules:
Unknown Addr:c1 SW Ver:0a
NCDM Addr:79 SW Ver:04

• Eight faults have been logged (Fault #0 to Fault #7); the next fault to
be logged will be Fault #8;
Also 11 operations have been logged (Operation #0 to Operation #10),
and 81 events have been logged (Event #0 to Event #80);
• The WESTRACE installation address is AADD84 (hex);
Unlike the installation address value displayed in GCSS, the value
reported by NGETLOG includes the three parity bits, so it should
match the value set by the 24 links on the vital backplane card;
• The current NCDM time is as shown;
• The NCDM Non-vital Configuration data version is 1 and the size of
F-2 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Operation
the Non-vital Configuration is 2560 bytes (rounded up to the nearest

128 bytes);
• The VLM6 Non-vital Configuration data version is 1 and the size is
131072 bytes (ie. 128 kbyte);
• The VLE Phase is currently Application Delay;
• There are four WESTRACE modules installed, with the specified
backplane addresses and software versions;
NGETLOG does not currently extract the module types from the
VLM6 Non-vital Configuration, hence all module types (apart from
the NCDM) are shown as ‘Unknown’.
Note: CED is an old term. It now only applies to the original VLM module
now known as VLM1.
Elsewhere in this manual, a VLM CED is known as ‘Vital PROM
Data’ and an NVC/DM or NCDM CED is known as ‘Non-vital Config-
uration’.
F.2.2 Upload Display

The sample below shows fault, operation and event data which has been
extracted from the NCDM
The following information is listed for each fault:

• Fault number;
• Date/time;
• Module backplane address (in this example all faults are NCDM
internal faults);
• Fault code, and for NCDM faults, a translation of the fault code into
English.
The following information is listed for each operation:

• Operation number;
• Date/time;
• Operation code and a translation of the operation code into English;
• Any additional logged data.
The following information is listed for each event:

• Event number;
• Date/time;
• Mnemonic name (with ‘NV_’ prefix for non-vital and ‘V_’ for vital)
and value (1 for energised, 0 for de-energised);
Mnemonic names are only displayed if the –i option was used to
specify a Non-vital Configuration image file.
OPR 0: 5/02/2003 14:13:30.7 0202 OPERATION BUFFER CLEARED ’P11’

OPR 1: 5/02/2003 14:13:30.7 0201 FAULT BUFFER CLEARED ’P11’
OPR 2: 5/02/2003 14:13:31.2 0200 EVENT BUFFER CLEARED ’P11’
OPR 3: 5/02/2003 14:13:48.0 0900 WESTRACE RESTART ’’
OPR 4: 5/02/2003 14:13:51.5 0100 LOGIN ’P11S1 write’

Operation
OPR 5: 5/02/2003 14:14:06.9 0600 VLM STATUS CHANGED ’0’


EVT 1: 5/02/2003 14:13:48.0 NV_NCDMOK = 1
EVT 2: 5/02/2003 14:13:48.0 NV_SERPORT1OK = 1
EVT 3: 5/02/2003 14:13:48.0 NV_SERPORT2OK = 1
EVT 4: 5/02/2003 14:13:48.0 NV_VLMPORTOK = 1
EVT 5: 5/02/2003 14:13:48.0 NV_NETPORTOK = 1
EVT 6: 5/02/2003 14:13:48.0 NV_NAPPDEL = 1
EVT 7: 5/02/2003 14:13:48.0 NV_NSTRDEL = 1
EVT 8: 5/02/2003 14:13:48.0 NV_NCONFLT = 1
EVT 9: 5/02/2003 14:13:50.1 NV_SERPORT1OK = 0
EVT 10: 5/02/2003 14:13:50.1 NV_SERPORT2OK = 0
EVT 11: 5/02/2003 14:13:53.2 NV_NSTRDEL1 = 1
EVT 12: 5/02/2003 14:14:06.9 V_NVCSEL = 1
EVT 13: 5/02/2003 14:14:06.9 V_OPCRFLT = 1
EVT 14: 5/02/2003 14:14:06.9 V_PIOFLT = 1
EVT 15: 5/02/2003 14:14:06.9 V_CONFLT = 1
EVT 16: 5/02/2003 14:14:59.7 V_STRDEL = 1
EVT 17: 5/02/2003 14:14:59.7 V_INTDET = 1
EVT 18: 5/02/2003 14:14:59.7 V_INTDET1 = 1
EVT 19: 5/02/2003 14:15:02.2 V_STRDEL1 = 1
EVT 20: 5/02/2003 14:15:02.7 V_APPDEL = 1
FLT 0: 5/02/2003 14:15:40.2 Unknown-b9 b019

FLT 1: 5/02/2003 14:15:44.2 Unknown-b9 b018
OPR 7: 5/02/2003 14:15:40.2 0104 FORCED LOGOUT ’P11S1’

OPR 8: 5/02/2003 14:15:44.2 0100 LOGIN ’P11S1 write’
EVT 21: 5/02/2003 14:15:50.2 NV_NAPPDEL1 = 1
EVT 22: 5/02/2003 14:17:02.8 V_APPDEL1 = 1

EVT 23: 5/02/2003 14:18:40.9 V_trig1 = 1
EVT 24: 5/02/2003 14:18:40.9 V_trig2 = 1
EVT 25: 5/02/2003 14:18:40.9 V_trig3 = 1
EVT 26: 5/02/2003 14:18:40.9 V_vpim1 = 1
EVT 27: 5/02/2003 14:18:41.9 NV_ntrig1 = 1
EVT 28: 5/02/2003 14:18:41.9 NV_ntrig2 = 1
EVT 29: 5/02/2003 14:18:41.9 NV_ntrig3 = 1
EVT 30: 5/02/2003 14:18:41.9 NV_vpim1 = 1
EVT 31: 5/02/2003 14:19:02.9 V_trig1 = 0
EVT 32: 5/02/2003 14:19:02.9 V_trig2 = 0
EVT 33: 5/02/2003 14:19:02.9 V_trig3 = 0
EVT 34: 5/02/2003 14:19:02.9 V_vpim1 = 0
EVT 35: 5/02/2003 14:19:03.9 NV_ntrig1 = 0
EVT 36: 5/02/2003 14:19:03.9 NV_ntrig2 = 0
EVT 37: 5/02/2003 14:19:03.9 NV_ntrig3 = 0
EVT 38: 5/02/2003 14:19:03.9 NV_vpim1 = 0
EVT 39: 5/02/2003 14:19:07.9 V_trig1 = 1
EVT 40: 5/02/2003 14:19:07.9 V_trig2 = 1
EVT 41: 5/02/2003 14:19:07.9 V_trig3 = 1
EVT 42: 5/02/2003 14:19:07.9 V_vpim1 = 1
EVT 43: 5/02/2003 14:19:08.9 NV_ntrig1 = 1
EVT 44: 5/02/2003 14:19:08.9 NV_ntrig2 = 1
EVT 45: 5/02/2003 14:19:08.9 NV_ntrig3 = 1
EVT 46: 5/02/2003 14:19:08.9 NV_vpim1 = 1

• At 14:13:48.0 the WESTRACE is restarted;
A special event, a ‘Restart Record’ is logged at this time to indicate
Operation
that the state of all mnemonics is assumed to be de-energised. Also

logged at this time are events for all non-vital mnemonics with an
initial state of energised;
• At 14:13:53.2 the non-vital NSTRDEL1 timer expires;
• At 14:14:06.9 the first message is received from the VLM6 containing
the initial vital states.
An event is logged for any energised state, and an operation is logged
to indicate that the VLM6 status is now 0 (ie. initialisation);
• At 14:14:59.6 the VLM6 status changes to 1 (application delay);
• At 14:15:40:2 a fault occurred forcing WESTRACE to terminate the
network connection;
• At 14:15:44:2 the network connection was re-established;
• At 14:15:50.2 the non-vital APPDEL1 timer expires;
• At 14:17:02.8 the vital APPDEL1 timer expires, and the VLM6 phase
changes to 2 (normal working) at 14:17:03.3;
• At 14:18:40.9 the first cycle of vital logic executes, and some
mnemonics change state as a consequence;
• At 14:18:41.9 the first cycle of non-vital logic executes, and some
mnemonics change state as a consequence.
F.2.3 Menu Functions

The following is the NGSETLOG menu:
1. Set Time
2. Get Earliest Snapshot
3. Get Latest Snapshot
4. Get Non Vital Port and Module Statistics
5. Clear Log Buffers
6. Clear Non Vital Port and Module Statistics
7. Get VLM6 Vital Port Statistics
8. Get VLM6 Vital and Non Vital Channel Statistics
9. Get Non Vital Network Session Statistics
10. Clear VLM6 Vital Port and Channel Statistics
99. Quit
These menu commands produce the following results:

• ‘1’ sets the NCDM time equal to the current PC time.
• ‘2’ or ‘3’ displays a snapshot of vital and non-vital states.
This snapshot corresponds to the state of the NCDM’s event buffer,
either at the start or the end.
A typical snapshot display is as follows:
Non-vital Snapshot Prior to Event 104

NV_NCDMOK=1 NV_PORTSOK=0 NV_TIMESYNCOUT=0 NV_TIMESYNCIN=0
NV_NAPPDEL=1 NV_NAPPDEL1=1 NV_NSTRDEL=1 NV_NSTRDEL1=1
NV_RESSTATEA=0 NV_RESSTATEB=0 NV_RESSTATEC=0 NV_RESSTATED=0
NV_RESTIMERA=0 NV_RESTIMERA1=0 NV_RESTIMERB=0 NV_RESTIMERB1=0
NV_abc=0 NV_def=0 NV_ghi=0 NV_vpim1=0
NV_vpim2=1 NV_vpim3=1 NV_vpim4=1 NV_vpim5=1
NV_vpim6=1 NV_vpim7=1 NV_vpim8=0 NV_nvrom1=1
NV_nvrom2=0 NV_nvrom3=0 NV_nvrom4=0 NV_nvrom5=0
NV_nvrom6=0 NV_nvrom7=0 NV_nvrom8=1

Operation
Vital Snapshot Prior to Event 104

V_NOPCR=0 V_NVCSEL=1 V_0LOIC=0 V_1LOIC=0
V_2LOIC=0 V_3LOIC=0 V_4LOIC=0 V_5LOIC=0
V_6LOIC=0 V_7LOIC=0 V_0LOOC=0 V_1LOOC=0
V_2LOOC=0 V_3LOOC=0 V_4LOOC=0 V_5LOOC=0
V_6LOOC=0 V_7LOOC=0 V_EXOPCR=0 V_OPCRFLT=1
V_PIOFLT=1 V_RCOVER=0 V_MYMODE=0 V_SBYSTAT=0
V_SSWITCH=0 V_CONFLT=1 V_RESLATA=0 V_RESLATB=0
V_APPDEL=1 V_APPDEL1=1 V_STRDEL=1 V_STRDEL1=1
V_INTDET=1 V_INTDET1=1 V_RESTMA=0 V_RESTMA1=0
V_RESTMB=0 V_RESTMB1=0 V_RESTMC=0 V_RESTMC1=0
V_RESTMD=0 V_RESTMD1=0 V_t1in=0 V_t1out=0
V_t2in=0 V_t2out=0 V_nvrom1=1 V_nvrom2=0
V_nvrom3=0 V_nvrom4=0 V_nvrom5=0 V_nvrom6=0
V_nvrom7=0 V_nvrom8=1 V_vpim1=0 V_vpim2=1
V_vpim3=1 V_vpim4=1 V_vpim5=1 V_vpim6=1
V_vpim7=1 V_vpim8=0
• ‘4’ displays telemetry statistics for each port and S2 Address.

These show number of:
• messages transmitted;
• messages received;
• line errors (eg bad CRC);
• overload errors and number of data errors (badly formatted or
inconsistent messages).
A typical statistics display follows below; (note that in this example
port 3, a WSA/S2 master port, has sent 3844 messages to S2 Address 1
but has received no replies—this would cause an S2 Address timeout
fault).

Port 4 -
Port 5 -
Port 6 -
Port 7 -
Port 9 -
Ports 10 and 11 correspond to ports A and B on the NCDM. See section

A.11.2.2.
• ‘5’ clears all logged fault, operation and event data on the NCDM;
• ‘6’ resets all non-vital port and S2 Address statistics to zero;
• ‘7’ gets vital port statistics for the VLM6;
Note: Module is equivalent to ‘S2 address’ in the example above.
• ‘8’ gets vital and non-vital channel statistics for the VLM6;
NON Vital channel 1 TX:506 Total RX:506 Total Valid RX:506

Bad CRC or BCC RX:0 Bad Header RX:0 Bad Channel RX:0
Inconsistent RX:0 Bad Sequence RX:0 Out of Date RX:0

Invalid Length RX:0
• ‘9’ gets non-vital network statistics;
Getting net stats for protocol -> 1, module -> 1

Rx’d OK : Protocol 1 Session 1 TX:196 RX:196 DataErrors:0
paramter error
paramter error
paramter error
Rx’d OK : Protocol 4 Session 0 TX:0 RX:0 DataErrors:0
paramter error
paramter error
F.3 Command Line Parameters

NGETLOG is controlled by entering a combination of the command line
parameters described in the sections that follow. All command line
parameters are case sensitive and can be entered in any order separated
but at least 1 blank character.
Type NGETLOG with no parameters to display a brief list of the available

parameters.
Type NGETLOG with the parameters listed in sections F.3.1 to F.3.5 to

achieve the desired objectives.
F.3.1 Mode Selection Options
–s selects Status mode
–m selects Menu mode
–f, –o, –e selects Upload mode.

The parameters cause the following to be displayed:
-f faults,
-o operations
-e events.
Each may be followed by a record number to start at; if no

number is specified, then only new data is uploaded (ie. data
logged after NGETLOG started running).
Example:
NGETLOG –f37 –o
will display faults in the NCDM buffer starting at fault #37, and any
faults or operations which occur while NGETLOG is running. No
events will be displayed.

Another example:
NGETLOG –f0 –o –e
will display all faults in the NCDM buffer, and any faults, operations or
events which occur while NGETLOG is running. This setting is equiv-
alent to what the NCDM MoviolaW driver does.
F.3.2 Functional Options
–v read Vital PROM Data and status information as well as Non-

vital Configuration
–nN assume NCDM is at backplane address N (hex)—if specified

then NCDM fault codes are displayed in English
–iS read non-vital mnemonics from file S_nvcdm.img (if –v spec-

ified, also read vital mnemonics from S.img)
–d debug mode, display all messages sent and received
F.3.3 File Output Options
OutFile copy displayed output to specified file (log data, snapshot or

statistics)
–c output log data to file in CSV format (for spreadsheet import,

allows faults, events and operations to be merged and sorted
by date/time, for example)
F.3.4 Link Configuration
–cS use network IP S
-tN set polling rate in ms/sec (default is 1000)
F.3.5 Protocol Configuration
–zN use session N
–aN selects NCDM diagnostic port address (default is 1)
–prS login for read using password S (default is WESTRACE)
–pwS login for write using password S (default is WESTRACE)
The default is to login for read if neither –pr nor –pw is specified.
APPENDIX G—S2 TELEMETRY MODULES
WESTRACE may use S2 modems and associated motherboards to

communicate vital and non-vital data to other sites or the remote control
centre.
There are several different modules and line connections that can be
used.
Refer to the WESTRONIC S2 First-line Maintenance Manual for configu-

ration and maintenance details.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 G-1

G-2 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Appendix H—Communication Module
Descriptions
APPENDIX H—COMMUNICATION MODULE

DESCRIPTIONS
This appendix describes the fundamental features of the communication

equipment which is part of this system and used to transmit the WEST-
ECT radio messages.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 H-1

Appendix H–Communication Module
Descriptions
Communications Rack
H.1 Communications Rack
H.1.1 Description
The Communications Rack is the external interface for the WESTECT
Encoder that generates the broadcast radio messages that define route
authorities. These radio messages are received by equipped trains in the
vicinity. There is no return communication channel from the train.
The Communications Rack is a 3 U high 19 inch rack, and comprises two

functions:
• Radio Control Module, RCM. (Made up from two PCBs fixed
together);
• 2 Radios. (Both are either MOTOROLA SYNTRX or TAIT).
The basic arrangement is shown in the following diagram.
TxD1
Radio Radio 1
Control PTT1
Module
(RCM) TxD2
PTT2
Radio 2
WESTRACE
WCM Module
Channel Power
Power
select select
Figure H.1: Block Diagram of Communication Housing
H.1.2 Function
The WESTECT Communication Module (WCM) in the WESTECT
Encoder provides serial data, handshake and radio control at RS232
levels. This is received by the RCM.
The RCM receives the data and modulates it using FFSK modulation,
suitable for transmission over a voice grade channel. It modifies the
control line levels suitable for the radios. The modulated data is provided
to both radios. The RCM controls the Press to Talk (PTT) function on
each radio such that the radios are keyed up alternatively. The RCM
ensures that the PTT is activated in time for the radio to key up
completely before data is sent and is only de-activated after the transmis-
sion has been completed.
Each radio in the Communications Rack is alternately selected for data

transmission at a rate of once per second.
H-2 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Descriptions
Communications Rack
H.1.3 Operation
The purpose of the system is to generate and broadcast a data message
that describes the routes set by the interlocking.
H.1.3.1 WESTECT Communication Module (WCM)
The WESTECT WCM module, described elsewhere, in conjunction with

the complete Encoder, is responsible for generation of the data message.
The WCM will only output data if:

• the 24V VSEV supply is present on the rear connector of the WCM
PFM, or;
• the Transmit Clock (TxC) is correctly supplied from the RCM, The
TxC is a 1200 Hz (approx 833μs period) square wave. Normal level is
approximately 1V.
The WCM generates the following RS232-C level signals:

• Transmit Select (TxS). This signal is used to select the radio to be
keyed up for transmission. One radio is selected during the high
output and the other during the low output (there is a small dead
band introduced by the RCM to ensure that both radios are not keyed
simultaneously);
The period is approximately 1.6 s. This may vary dependant on the
size of the encoder but should never be greater than 2 s;
• Transmit Key (TxK). This signal is used to key up the radios;
• Transmit Data (TxD). This signal contains the data to be transmitted.
The data is encoded using bi-sync protocol and therefore the normal
character formatting separation using start and stop bits cannot be
seen.
H.1.3.2 Radio and Control Module (RCM)
The RCM module is responsible for modulation of the data signal and
providing the control signals to the radios.
The RCM is powered from the encoder 24 V supply.
The RCM interfaces to the WCM using the signals described in the pervi-
ous section.
The RCM generates:

• The Transmit Clock (TxC) required by the WCM;
• Press to Talk (PTT) output to each radio;
The PTT is generated from ANDing the TxS and TxK inputs for radio
A and the !TxS and TxK inputs for radio B. The combination of these
signals ensures a dead band between transmissions to ensure that
one radio shuts down before the other radio is keyed up;
The PTT signal at nominal 12V is supplied from the radio and is
selected by an opto coupler on the RCM. The PTT signal will be
typically 2V to 4V when a radio is keyed up;
• Modulated Data. This is fed out on a balanced 600 Ohm line. The data

Descriptions
Communications Rack
is modulated using FFSK modulation in the voice frequency band.
H.1.3.3 Radios
There are two radios used in each installation. These transmit alter-
nately as controlled by the TxS signal generated by the WCM. A receive
function is not implemented although some radios used incorporate a
receiver.
The radios are powered from a 12V supply.
The inputs are described in the previous sections.
Radios may be selected for one of 8 different frequencies. In practice, only

6 different frequencies are used.
The frequency for both radios is selected by commoning terminals on the

internal terminal rail of the Communications Rack as detailed in tables
H1 and H2.
Note: Table H1 refers to Westinghouse drawing No. 26103057. Table H2

refers to Westinghouse drawing No. 26103055.
Make connections using wire links fitted with 0.25 inch quick connect
lugs between the terminals shown to set the required transmit radio
channels.
Radio 1 Radio 2
Channel Frequency S3 S2 S1 S3 S2 S1
(MHz) Conn 11 Conn 10 Conn 9 Conn 15 Conn 14 Conn 13
1 418.250 RGND1 RGND RGND
2 418.550 RGND RGND RGND RGND
3 418.850 RGND RGND
5 418.900 RGND RGND
6 418.925 RGND RGND
Table H1: Radio Channel Selection (TAIT Radios)

1. RGND is on terminals 3, 4, 5 & 6.
Radio 1 Radio 2
1 418.250 R1P1 R1P 1CSCOM2 R2P3 R2P 2CSCOM4
2 418.550 R1P 1CSCOM R1P R2P 2CSCOM R2P
Table H2: Radio Channel Selection (Motorola Radios)
Descriptions
Communications Rack
Radio 1 Radio 2
3 418.850 R1P 1CSCOM 1CSCOM R2P 2CSCOM 2CSCOM
4 418.875 1CSCOM R1P R1P 2CSCOM R2P R2P
5 418.900 1CSCOM R1P 1CSCOM 2CSCOM R2P 2CSCOM
6 418.925 1CSCOM 1CSCOM R1P 2CSCOM 2CSCOM R2P
Table H2: Radio Channel Selection (Motorola Radios) (Continued)

1. R1P is terminals 4,5 & g
2. 1CSCOM is terminals 9,10,11,12,13
3. R2P is terminals 21, 22, 23
4. 2CSCOM is terminals 26,27, 28,29,30p
Motorola radios may be configured by link selection as detailed in table

H3 for either 1W or 5W transmit power.
The Tait radios are factory preset for operation at either 5W or 25W
transmit power. Rated power output is 25W, however the range of adjust-
ment is 5–25 W.
Motorola Radio 1 Radio 2
1W 1PSEL (terminal 8 on 2PSEL (terminal 25 on

Radio Terminal Rail) Radio Terminal Rail)
connected to 1CSCOMM connected to 2CSCOMM
(0V) (0V)
5W 1PSEL (terminal 8 on 2PSEL (terminal 25 on

Radio Terminal Rail) left Radio Terminal Rail) left
open circuit open circuit
Table H3: Setting of Motorola Radio Power Output
Some applications may use an rf attenuator in the radio output.
H.1.4 Configuration
H.1.4.1 Radio Channel
Select the radio channel designated for the specific encoder. Refer to
tables H1 and H2.
H.1.4.2 Transmit Power
Select the power output designated tor the specific area Refer to table H3.
H.1.5 Indications
H.1.5.1 Start Up
• Remove 12 V power from the radios.
• Apply power to the Encoder.

Descriptions
Communications Rack
• Wait 60 seconds after all Encoder green watchdog LEDs are flashing.
• Apply power to the radios.
The lower PCB of the RCM unit has a single green LED which dims
slightly when either radio transmits. The LED should dim with a
frequency of once every second. Dimming should begin to occur within
45 seconds of power up.
H.1.5.2 Operation
During correct operation, the RCM's LED will dim in time with each
radio transition.
TAIT radios have a GREEN LED mounted on the chassis, that indicate
power is on. A RED LED, also mounted on the chassis, illuminates when
the radio is transmitting. It is therefore possible to observe that both
radios are keyed up alternately.
MOTOROLA radios have no visible indication the radios are either

powered or transmitting.
Both radios types should be warm to the touch when correctly opera-
tional.
H.1.5.3 Fault Codes
None.
Descriptions
Remote RCM
H.2 Remote RCM
H.2.1 Description
The Remote RCM is the external interface for the WESTECT Encoder
that generates the broadcast radio messages that define route authori-
ties. These radio messages are received by equipped trains in the vicin-
ity. There is no return communication channel from the train.
The remote RCM is installed near the WESTECT encoder. It is used when
a communications rack with radios only is installed some distance from
the encoder. Communication between the RCM and the Communication
rack is via cable.
H.2.2 Function
sion has been completed
Each radio in the Communications Rack is alternately selected for data

transmission at a rate of once per second.

Descriptions
Remote RCM
H.2.3 Operation
that describes the routes set by the interlocking.
A description of the whole communication system is included, even

those this goes beyond the RCM. This is to assist in understanding the
operation.
H.2.3.1 WESTECT WCM Module
The WESTECT WCM module, described elsewhere, in conjunction with


• The 24V VSEV supply is present on the rear connector of the WCM
PFM;
• The Transmit Clock (TxC) is correctly supplied from the RCM, The
TxC is a 1200 Hz (approx 833ms period) square wave. Normal level is
approximately 1V.

simultaneously);
The data is encoded using bisync protocol and therefore the normal
seen.
H.2.3.2 WESTECT Remote Radio and Communication Module
The RCM interfaces to the WCM using the signals described in the previ-
ous section.
The RCM generates:

• The Transmit Clock (TxC) required by the WCM.
• Press to Talk (PTT) output to each radio.
one radio shuts down before the other radio is keyed up.
Descriptions
Remote RCM
typically 2V to 4V when a radio is keyed up.
H.2.4 Indications
H.2.4.1 Start Up
H.2.4.2 Operation
During correct operation, the RCM’s LED will dim in time with each
radio transition.

tional.
H.2.4.3 Fault Codes
None.

Descriptions
H.3
Descriptions
Remote Communications Rack
H.4 Remote Communications Rack
H.4.1 Description
The Remote Communications Rack is used to broadcast WESTECT
encoder radio messages. It is connected to the Remote RCM. These radio
messages are received by equipped trains in the vicinity. There is no
return communication channel from the train.
The Remote Communications Rack is a 3 U high 19 inch rack, and

comprises:
• 2 Radios. (Both are either MOTOROLA SYNTRX or TAIT).
This equipment is always used in conjunction with a Remote RCM

module whenever the radios must be installed a significant distance
from the WESTECT Encoder. The communications link between the
Remote RCM and the Remote Communications Rack is suitable for use
with communications cable. The high attenuation of the RF signal in the
antenna coax cable means that the distance between the radios and the
antennae should be kept to a minimum.
H.4.2 Function

Descriptions
sion has been completed
Each radio in the Remote Communications Rack is alternately selected

for data transmission at a rate of once per second.
H.4.3 Operation
that describes the routes set by the interlocking. The complete interface
will be described in the following paragraphs, even though this equip-
ment only comprises the communication rack.
H.4.3.1 WESTECT WCM Module
The WESTECT WCM module, described elsewhere, in conduction with


• The 24 V VSEV supply is present on the rear connector of the WCM
PFM;
• The Transmit Clock (TxC) is correctly supplied from the RCM. The
TxC is a 1200 Hz (approx 833ms period) square wave. Normal level is
approximately 1 V.

simultaneously);
The data is encoded using bisync protocol and therefore the normal
seen.
H.4.3.2 WESTECT Radio and Control Module (RCM)
The RCM interfaces to the WCM using the signals described in the previ-
ous section.
The RCM generates:

• The Transmit Clock (TxC) required by the WCM;
Descriptions
• Press to Talk (PTT) output to each radio;

one radio shuts down before the other radio is keyed up.
typically 2V to 4V when a radio is keyed up.
H.4.3.3 Remote Communication Rack—Radios
There are two radios used in each installation. These transmit alter-
nately as controlled by the TxS signal generated by the WCM. A receive
function is not implemented although some radios used incorporate a
receiver
The radios are powered from a 12V supply.
The inputs are described in the previous sections.
Radios may be selected for one 8 different frequencies. In practice, only 6

different frequencies are used.
The frequency is selected by commoning terminals on the internal termi-

nal rail of the Remote Communications Rack as detailed in tables H4 and
H5.
Note: Table H4 refers to Westinghouse drawing No. 26103056. Table H5

refers to Westinghouse document WETZCTRM.
Make connections using wire links fitted with 0.25 inch quick connect
lugs between the terminals shown to set the required transmit radio
channels.
Radio 1 Radio 2
MHz) Conn 11 Conn 10 Conn 9 Conn 15 Conn 14 Conn 13
1 418.250 RGND1 RGND RGND
3 418.850 RGND RGND
5 418.900 RGND RGND
6 418.925 RGND RGND%%
Table H4: Tait Radio Channel Selection

1. RGND is on terminals 3, 4, 5 & 6.

Descriptions
Radio 1 Radio 2
1 418.250 R1P1 R1P 1CSCOM2 R2P3 R2P 2CSCOM4
2 418.550 R1P 1CSCOM R1P R2P 2CSCOM R2P
3 418.850 R1P 1CSCOM 1CSCOM R2P 2CSCOM 2CSCOM
4 418.875 1CSCOM R1P R1P 2CSCOM R2P R2P
5 418.900 1CSCOM R1P 1CSCOM 2CSCOM R2P 2CSCOM
6 418.925 1CSCOM 1CSCOM R1P 2CSCOM 2CSCOM R2P
Table H5: Motorola Radio Channel Selection

1. R1P is terminals 4,5 & g
2. 1CSCOM is terminals 9, 10,11,12,13
3. R2P is terminals 21, 22, 23
4. 2CSCOM is terminals 26,27, 28,29,30p
Motorola radios may be configured by link selection for either 1W or 5W

transmit power.
The Tait radios are factory preset for operation at either 5W or 25W
transmit power (depending on how they are ordered).
H.4.4 Configuration
H.4.4.1 Radio Channel
Select the radio channel designated for the specific encoder. Refer to
tables H4 and H5.
H.4.5 Indications
H.4.5.1 Start Up
H.4.5.2 Operation
During correct operation, the RCM’s LED will dim in time with each
radio transition.
Descriptions

tional.
H.4.5.3 Fault Codes
None.

Descriptions
H.5
Appendix I—Repair Request Form
APPENDIX I—REPAIR REQUEST FORM
This appendix provides a WESTRACE Repair Request form (2 pages) that

you can print or photocopy.
Use this form:

• to record fault codes as seen on each module at the same instant;
• to record which module failed;
• as part of your internal fault records.
Send your faulty module for repair together with this completed form to:
Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia
179–185 Normanby Road, South Melbourne, Victoria 3205, Australia.
Tel: +61 3 9233 8794 Fax: +61 3 9233 8777
The WRSA repair centre will test the module and compare your fault
codes with the test fault codes. Repair technicians may determine that
the fault was caused by your system rather than the faulty module alone.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 I-1

WESTRACE Repair Request WRSA Reference
Part 1: Return Details

Contact Details Return Details
Name Name
Organisation Organisation
Address Address
Phone Phone
Fax Fax
Email Email
Commercial
Are you claiming warranty? Yes ■ No ■ Your Order Number
Faulty Equipment Details
Installation Name Installation Location
Date Equipment Installed
Date of Equipment Fault Date Faulty Equipment Returned
Faulty Equipment Type or Name
Faulty Equipment Serial No. Replacement Equipment Serial No.
Fault Details
Please record all WESTRACE module fault indications on Part 2: Fault Report.
Further Details
WRSA Use Only
WRSA Date In
WRSA Repair No.
Repaired by
Additional information attached ■ Returned
Return this form with the equipment for repair to

179–185 Normanby Road, South Melbourne, Victoria 3205, Australia
Tel: +61 3 9233 8794 Fax: +61 3 9233 8777
WESTRACE Repair Request WRSA Reference
Part 2: Fault Report

Location
Interlocking ID Fault Date Fault Time
Organisation Technician Name
Show all WESTRACE module fault indications (LEDs and alphanumerics) as seen at time of failure, and circle
any modules replaced:
Housing 1 PSU 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Hex Code*
Housing 2 PSU 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Hex Code*
Housing 3 PSU 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Hex Code*
Housing 4 PSU 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Hex Code*
* Fault codes are listed in Appendix A of the WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual and the WESTRACE Application Manual.
Was OPCR energised at the time of failure? Yes ■ No ■

Did the system re-start when reset? Yes ■—Please attach a printout of the the relevant section of the log
(eg use GETLOG or NGETLOG).
No ■
If not, when did it fail? When reset ■ Before OPCR energised ■ After OPCR energised ■
Additional information attached ■

SSAF_WRR Issue 1.0
Glossary
GLOSSARY GLOSSARY
2nd Negation Part of the WESTRACE Backplane. Provides a mechanism for vital
WESTRACE modules to negate the system in the event of a fault being
detected. See also Negation.
Application Logic The logic that defines how the inputs and outputs for a particular installation
are related.
Approach Locking The locking which is applied after the signal has cleared to prevent the signal
attempting to normalise a route in front of a train.
Aspect The current state shown by a signal, eg Stop, Caution, Proceed, Reduce Speed
etc.
ATP Automatic Train Protection
AWS Automatic Warning System
Backplane Interconnects all WESTRACE modules, incorporates the Inter Module Bus,
Fault Bus, Health Monitoring, 2nd Negation and various other interfaces.
BCC Block Checksum Character. A method for validating the integrity of digital
data.
Boolean Logic A method to define and evaluate the logical relationship between digital
inputs and outputs. An equation consists of terms which are combined using
AND, OR and NOT operators.
bps Bits per second
Buried Earth A connection made to earth by means of driving, or burying one, or more
earth rods or conductors.
CBI Computer Based Interlocking—a generic term applied to interlockings using

microprocessors.
CCSS Configuration Check Sub-System—a WESTRACE software package that

executes on an IBM compatible PC. It is used by Signal Engineers to verify
that the CED fitted to an interlocking is the correct version and has not
changed from the source data. Used for VLM-based systems.
CEC Configuration Element Card—the CEC is part of the VLM. The PROMs
containing the CED are fitted to the CEC on VLM1-based systems.
CED Configuration Element Data—configuration data, application logic, module

definitions and mnemonic names. The vital CED is stored in PROMs which
are installed on the VLM1 or HVLM modules. ‘Vital PROM Data’ is the
equivalent term when discussing later vital logic modules.
‘Non-vital Configuration’ is the term used when discussing non-vital data

that is downloaded to the NVC/DM or NCDM.
CIM Communications Interface Module—part of a NVC/DM, provides the serial

interfaces.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 Glossary-1

Glossary
CIMFIM Communications Interface Module Filter Interface Module—part of a CIM,

contains level translation and filtering electronics.
CIMPM Communications Interface Module Protection Module—part of a CIM,

contains transient protection electronics.
CNVC Configurable Non-Vital Communication Module
Coil An internal logic state which forms the output of a logic rung.
Compilation The process of creating the CED from the source file information.
Contact An internal logic state which is used as an input to a logic rung.
Control System The interface between the signaller and the railway signalling system. It may
take the form of the rail authority’s central control centre, or a local hard
wired panel, or a control computer.
Control Tables A method of representing the interlocking functions in a form which is

commonly used by Railway Industry.
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check—a method for validating the integrity of digital
data.
CS Configuration System—a set of WESTRACE software packages that executes

on an IBM compatible PC and an associated manual. The CS comprises the
CSS and CCSS. Used for VLM-based systems.
CSS Configuration Sub-System—a WESTRACE software package that executes

on an IBM compatible PC. Used by Signal Engineers to design and simulate
Application Data for WESTRACE Vital Signalling Systems. Used for VLM-
based systems. Has been superseded by GCSS.
CTSS WESTECT ATP Transponder Configuration Sub-System
Cycle [WESTRACE] WESTRACE is designed to operate cyclically. Each cycle comprises the
major phases of accepting input data, evaluating the logic once, delivering
output the data and performing health checks.
Cycle Time The time taken to execute one complete WESTRACE cycle. This will vary,
unless fixed for hot standby purposes, according to the number of I/O
modules connected and the logic evaluated.
Diagnostic Module See DM.
Diagnostic System See MoviolaW.
DM Diagnostic Module— a WESTRACE module that monitors and records all

changes of state and fault information in the WESTRACE system. The DM
has external interface ports for interrogation the system and for
transmitting data. A collective term which includes the original DM and the
DM128. To be replaced by the NVC/DM or NCDM.
DTC Direct Traffic Control—a computer-based train control system used to

electronically manage and validate train movements in non-signalled
territory.
Glossary-2 Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia Invensys Rail Systems India Pvt Ltd
Glossary
DWL Data Word Length—specific to the WSA/S2 protocol and indicates the
number of data bits in a message.
EPROM Blowing A printed record of EPROM programming.

Form
EPROM The process of storing data in EPROMs.

Programming
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory—a type of PROM. Used to store

the CED and module software on the HVLM128.
Equipment Room Any building, fixed, or transportable, other than a control centre, housing
WESTRACE equipment.
Event A transition in the state of an ILS. All events are logged by WESTRACE.
Event Log MoviolaW creates event logs of the WESTRACE operation and stores these
logs for a defined period. Events recorded in the event log can be replayed.
External Diagnostic See MoviolaW.

System
EVTC Enhanced Vital Telemetry Continuous Module—a WESTRACE module used

for vital communication (66 bit) between two WESTRACE systems. For new
installations, EVTC modules are recommended in place of VTC modules.
Fail-Safe The attribute of a process or equipment that ensures that each and every
failure or combination of failures results in the system attaining safe
condition.
Modern safety engineering prefers the term ‘safety critical’ and to define
safety integrity levels.
Fatal Fault A software or hardware fault which makes the continued operation of a
module impossible. A fatal fault in a vital module will result in negation of
the system before the safe operation of the railway is compromised. See also
Non-fatal Fault.
Fault Bus Part of the WESTRACE Backplane. Provides a mechanism for WESTRACE
modules to report fault codes to the DM or NVC/DM.
Fault Code An numerical code which a WESTRACE module displays on its front panel
fault display and which is logged by the DM or NVC/DM. This code indicates
a self-diagnosed fault in the module, or, in the case of the NVC/DM, an
externally connected module. Phase 1 WESTRACE modules use 8 bit fault
codes, while the NVC/DM use 16 bit codes.
Flash Memory Non-volatile computer memory which can be written to as well as read from
during operation.
GCS Graphical Configuration System—a set of Windows-based WESTRACE

applications and associated manuals. The GCS comprises the GCSS and the
ICS. Used for all WESTRACE using HVLM128 or later vital logic module
based systems.
GCSS Graphical Configuration Sub-System—a Windows-based WESTRACE

application used by Signal Engineers to enter data to define the functionality

Glossary
of the WESTRACE system. Used for all WESTRACE using HVLM128 or later
vital logic module based systems.
GSIM Graphic Simulator —a Windows-based WESTRACE application that

provides graphic on-screen simulation of Local Control Panels and the status
of tracks and trackside equipment of the railway under simulation.
HDLC High-level Data Link Control protocol—a commonly used computer protocol
for serial communication. The WSA/S2 and protocol is based on HDLC.
Health Monitoring Part of the WESTRACE Backplane. Provides a mechanism for vital
WESTRACE modules to check the health of each other.
Hot Standby The arrangement where two WESTRACE installations, a main and a
standby, run in parallel. The standby system is able to automatically take
over in the event of a fault.
Housing The physical unit used to hold the WESTRACE modules in an installation.
Up to four housings may be interconnected within the one installation.
HVBC Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card—a small, half height, printed circuit
board installed directly behind the lower connectors of the HVLM128.
HVLC Hot Standby Vital Logic card—is the central processing module for an
HVLM128.
HVLM128 Hot Standby Vital Logic Module—a WESTRACE that controls the operation
of each WESTRACE system. It performs all logic processing and supervises
communication between each WESTRACE module and itself. Two systems
using these modules may be operated as main and standby with automatic
changeover on most failure situations.
HVLM128a Hot Standby Vital Logic Module—same as HVLM128 but with modified
capacities.
HVLM PFM Hot Standby Vital Logic Module Protection and Filter module.
I/O Input and Output
I/O Assignments The allocation of mnemonics to specify inputs and outputs.
ICS Installation Check System—WESTRACE software used by the Signal

Engineer to verify that the Configuration Data PROMs fitted to an
installation are valid and are consistent with the approved design. Used for
HVLM128-based systems.
IHCL Inter-HVLM Communications Link—a fibre-optic connection used in a hot

standby system to transfer data between the main and standby VLMs.
INCL Inter NCDM Communications Link. A fibre-optic connection used in a Hot

Standby system to transfer data between the main and standby NCDMs.
ILS Internal Logic State—a one-bit storage element which is associated with a
mnemonic name.
Image File A copy of an installation’s vital or non-vital CED stored on a PC for use by
tools such as MoviolaW.
Glossary
IMB Inter Module Bus—part of the WESTRACE Backplane. Provides general

purpose parallel data communication between the VLM and other
WESTRACE modules.
Initialisation This is a time prior to normal operation when the installation determines the
(System) current state of the external inputs.
Installation A single physical WESTRACE system, comprising up to four standard

WESTRACE housings.
A set of railway signalling application data.
Input The input to the VLE.
ISIM Interlocking Simulator—a WESTRACE tool that enables testing of railway

signalling logic in the office prior to commissioning a system.
Ladder Logic A form of boolean logic that is used to define the application data. It consists
of relay equivalent logic and is input using the GCSS or CSS.
Latches These are internal logic states within the installation logic and are shown as
relay coils in the ladder logic. They do not have a physical input or output.
LEC Logic Evaluation Card—part of an NVC/DM. Performs all (non-vital) logic

and communications processing.
LED Light Emitting Diode
Location Case A metal cabinet housing WESTRACE equipment.
MB Megabyte
Mnemonic Abbreviated names that consists of numbers and letters to represent

particular logic states or functions.
Module Bit This is the process of allocating mnemonics to I/O bits on a module.
Allocation
MoviolaW MoviolaW is a suite of Microsoft Windows based diagnostic tools for

WESTRACE Vital Signalling Systems and other railway systems.
Multidrop A serial cable configuration where multiple slave devices are connected to a
single cable coming from a master device. The cable can be a single line or
loop configuration. See also Point-to-point.
Master
Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave
Master Slave Slave Slave
Slave Slave
NCDC Network Communication Diagnostic Card—the NCDM’s main circuit board.
NCD PFM or Network Communication Diagnostic Protection and Filter Module

NCDC PFM

Glossary
NCDM Network Communications Diagnostic Module—comprises an NCDC and an

NCD PFM.
Negation Shutting the system down to a safe state.
Non-fatal Fault Faults such in software, hardware or other equipment that do not
compromise the safe operation of the railway. See also Fatal Fault.
Non-Vital Telemetry The means of communicating non-vital data from the WESTRACE to an
external system such as a local control panel or control centre.
NVC Non-Vital Communication Module—a WESTRACE serial data module used

for communicating serially between WESTRACE Installations and a non-
vital control system or similar.
NVC/DM Non-vital Control and Diagnostic Module
NVLM An acronym representing non-vital logic modules such as the NVC/DM or

NCDM.
OPC Output Power Card—part of VLM and HVLM128. A circuit board that
controls the OPCR andVSEV.
OPC-PFM Output Power Card Protection and Filter Module.
OPCC Output Power Control Card
OPCM Output Power Control Module—comprises an OPCC, a VBC and an OPC-

PFM.
OPCR Output Power Control Relay (or followed relay)—used to isolate parallel
outputs when the WESTRACE system cannot be guaranteed to be operating
safely. This relay is used as the final arbiter of system safety.
Output The output of the VLE, such as a relay or lamp output.
PC Abbreviation for Personal Computer (historically, an “IBM compatible”

personal computer).
PCGE Personal Computer Graphic Editor—a PC based application used to create

graphical display files used by MoviolaW, WESTCAD and GSIM.
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PFM Protection and Filtering Module—used to isolate the internal WESTRACE

environment from the external electrical environment by providing
screening, filtering and over-voltage protection.
PIOFLT Parallel Input Output Fault—a vital mnemonic representing a parallel input
or output fault.
PM Protection Module
Point-to-point A cable configuration where a separate cable is used to link two systems. See
also Multidrop.
Printouts Output from a computer driven printer.
Glossary
PRM Portable Radio Monitor
PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory—a computer memory device which

retains its contents without power.
PROM Program The printed record of PROM programming having taken place.
Form
PROM Programming The process used to store data into PROMs.
PSU Power Supply Unit
PTM Portable Transponder Module
RAM Random Access Memory
RS232-C An electrical interface standard used for serial connection of one device to
another (Point-to-point) for the purpose of data communications.
RS422 An electrical interface standard that uses differential signal levels allowing
operation over longer distances.
RS485 Electrically similar to RS422 but also supports Multidrop operation.
RSE Railway Signalling Equipment
RTC Real Time Clock
Rung A part of Ladder Logic. A rung is the group of logic (relay equivalent
contacts) that control a latch or output (relay equivalent coil).
SDLC Synchronous Data-Link Protocol—see HDLC.
SIL Safety (or sometimes Software) Integrity Level
Simulation Testing of the WESTRACE Application Logic on a PC or other device rather

than the actual system.
Slot This is a space in a housing where WESTRACE modules can be inserted.

WESTRACE modules occupy one or more slots.
Source File A file that contains the data that has been entered into the GCSS or CSS.
Surge Arrester Any device for controlling electrical surges on circuits entering a location,
including gas discharge arresters, semiconductor arresters, or arresters
combining both types.
Telemetry Data communication system. The process of transmitting data between two
points.
Temporary The process of forcing a timed approach control on a signal to minimise

Approach Control entrance speed. The total process or applying, retaining and removing the
control must allow it to be vital.
Time-of-Day Timer A timer whose output is set at a particular time of day.

Glossary
Timer A device or circuit that provides time signals at regular, specified intervals
for purposes of controlling a sequence of events or synchronising events in
separate operations. Ladder logic uses software timers.
Timestamp Indicates the date and time at which a logged event, fault or operation
occurred.
Transfer States A set of logic states that will be able to be transferred from the NVC/DM to
the VLM and vice versa.
UHVBC Universal Hot Standby Vital Backplane Card—interconnects the VLC, the
OPCC and the OPC-PFM. Also contains links for setting the installation
address.
VBC Vital Backplane Card—interconnects the VLC, the OPCC, the CEC (original-
VLC only) and the OPC-PFM. Also contains links for setting the installation
address.
Vital Pertaining to system safety. Used an adjective to describe a process, function

or equipment that, when not operating correctly, can adversely affect the
safety of a system.
Vital Bar Generic term to refer to Vital Blocking and Temporary Approach Control.
Vital Blocking Process used to prevent the Signalling System to allow sections of track being
allowed to be occupied. The total process or applying, retaining and
removing the block must allow the blocking to be vital
Vital Communication of data that required for the safe operation of the
Communications WESTRACE system. Vital communication is between WESTRACE systems.
VLC Vital Logic Card—a general term for the original VLC, the HVLC, the VLC5
and the VLC6.
VLC5 Vital Logic Card for the VLM5.
VLC6 Vital Logic Card for the VLM6.
VLE Vital Logic Equipment—is the physical WESTRACE equipment, both vital
and non-vital.
VLM Vital Logic Module—WESTRACE which controls the operation of each

WESTRACE system. It performs all logic processing and supervises
communication between each WESTRACE module and itself. This is a
collective term for the original VLM1, the HVLM128, the VLM5 and the
VLM6.
VLM1 Vital Logic Module1—the name given in the WRSA WESTRACE manuals to
the original and largely superseded vital logic module which was known as
the VLM.
VLM128 See HVLM128.
VLM128a See HVLM128a.
VLM5 Vital Logic Module—has essentially the same functionality as the HVLM128
but has a greater capacity.
Glossary
VLM6 Vital Logic Module—has essentially the same capacity as the VLM5 but can
also provide vital communications over a network to connected WESTRACE
systems when used in conjuction with an NCDM.
VLOM Vital Lamp Output Module—WESTRACE module used for driving relays or
similar loads.
VPIM Vital Parallel Input Module—WESTRACE module used for accepting vital
parallel inputs into a WESTRACE installation.
VROM Vital Relay Output Module—WESTRACE module used for driving signalling
relays or similar loads.
VSEV Vital Serial Enable Voltage—a vital control voltage used to enable vital
serial communications to and from a WESTRACE installation.
VTC Vital Telemetry Continuous Module—a WESTRACE module used for vital
communication (17 bit) between two WESTRACE systems.
WCM WESTECT Communication Module—used to communicate signalling

information from an interlocking or WESTECT Encoder to an ATP equipped
train. It is used as part of the WESTECT ATP system.
WESTECT WEStinghouse automatic train ProTECTion.
WESTECT ATP WESTECT Automatic Train Protection is a Westinghouse Rail Systems

Australia proprietary system that overlays on a WESTRACE signalling
system and prevents driver error from endangering the train.
WESTECT Encoder In its simplest form, a WESTECT Encoder comprises a WESTRACE system,
a communications rack and an antenna system.
WESTRACE WESTRACE is an acronym for WEStinghouse Train Radio Advanced

Control Equipment. It is a modular, safety critical, programmable
electronic signalling system that has been designed for safety control
systems for Railway Signalling.
WESTRACE I/O General term for any module designed to be plugged into a slot in a
Module WESTRACE housing, excluding diagnostic and logic processing modules.
WNC WESTRACE Network Communications—generic name for complete

WESTRACE system using and NCDM to facilitate communications over an
Ethernet network.
WNCM WESTRACE Network Communications Module—comprises the VLM6 and

NCDM.
WRSA Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia
WSA/S2 A serial telemetry protocol developed by Westinghouse Rail Systems

Australia.
WSL/S2 A serial telemetry protocol developed by Westinghouse Signals Limited

(UK).

Reader’s Comments
Westinghouse Rail Systems Australia values your thoughts as the user of this document. We would be
grateful to receive your views about this document and welcome any suggestions for improvement.
Please send your comments to:
The Manager, Technology and Training
179–185 Normanby Road (Locked Bag 66), South Melbourne, VIC 3205
Phone +61 3 9233 8840 Fax +61 3 9233 8702 Email wrsa-training@wrsa.com.au
Document Name:
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual
WRTOFLMM-WRSI, Issue 10.0
Document Owner:
Contact Name:
Address:
Email:
On a scale of 1 to 10, please rate this document for being suitable to your needs. A rating of 0 means
this document is of no benefit; a rating of 10 means it is completely satisfactory for the intended
purpose.
0 5 10
Rating: no benefit very useful
Comments:
Signed: Dated:
Comments are continued on the following _______ pages.
WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0


1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WESTRACE

First-Line Maintenance Manual

Document CI: WRTOFLMM

Date of Issue: 10 February 2009

Controlled Copy Number:

This is the First-Line Maintenance Manual for WESTRACE Vital

WESTRACE is a safety critical system.

Any maintenance of the WESTRACE equipment that does not

WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 v

2 WESTRACE, WESTECT and Safety

5 WESTRACE Operating Characteristics

WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 vii

7 Fault Conditions and Errors

8 WESTECT Communication Equipment—Fault Finding

9 WESTECT Transponders—Fault Finding and Replacement

9.5 Personal Safety 9-2

Appendix A—Module Descriptions

WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 ix

A.3.3.2 Output Power Card (OPC) A-49

A.8 Vital Telemetry Continuous Module (VTC) A-78

WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 xi

A.11.6.6 Fault Detection A-110

A.13.4 Configuration A-152

WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 xiii

A.16.5 Configuration A-170

Appendix B—Diagnostic Module Technician Interface

Appendix C—Diagnostic Module Logging Package

Appendix E—GETLOG Utility

Appendix F—NGETLOG Utility

Appendix G—S2 Telemetry Modules

WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 xv

Appendix H—Communication Module Descriptions

Appendix I—Repair Request Form

WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 xvii

A.31 User Interface—NCD PFM—NCDM A-108

WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 xix

A39 DB9 Pinout—RS232 Connection—NCD PFM—NCDM A-120

1.1 New in This Issue

1.2 Purpose of the Manual

Maintenance personnel should:

1.4 Scope of the Manual

Where WESTECT ATP is not installed, ignore the sections in this

WESTRACE First-Line Maintenance Manual Issue 10.0 1-1

The following WESTRACE manuals also provide relevant information.

[SOM] WESTRACE System Overview Manual, WRTOOVER: describes

[APPM] WESTRACE Application Manual, WRTOAPPM: describes the

[CS] WESTRACE Configuration System User Manual, WRTOCS:

[CSS] WESTRACE Configuration Sub-System User Manual, WRTOCSS:

[CCSS] WESTRACE Configuration Check Sub-System User Manual,

[GCSS] WESTRACE Graphical Configuration Sub-System User Manual,

[GSIM] WESTRACE Graphical Simulator User Manual, WRTOGSIM:

[MOV] MoviolaW User Manual, WRTOMOLA: describes how to set up and

[ICS] WESTRACE Installation Check System User Manual, WRTO_ICS:

[ISIM] WESTRACE Interlocking Simulator User Manual, WRTOISIM:

[PCGE] WESTRACE PC Graphical Editor Manual. WRTOPCGE: describes

[DRI] WESTECT ATP Drivers Manual. WETO_DRI: describes the use

[PRM] WESTECT Portable Radio Monitor User Manual. WETO_PRM: